2015 E-SERIES Owner’s Manual
2015 E-SERIES Owner’s Manual
July 2014
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
E-Series
Litho in U.S.A.
FC2J 19A321 AA
fordowner.com ford.ca
Introduction 7
Child Safety 16
Child seat positioning ...................................18
Booster seats .........................................20
Installing child seats ....................................23
Safety Belts 29
Fastening the safety belts ................................31
Safety belt height adjustment .............................34
Safetybeltwarninglightandindicatorchime..................35
Safety belt-minder .....................................35
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance ...................37
Supplementary Restraints System 38
Driver and passenger airbags .............................40
Crash sensors and airbag indicator .........................46
Airbag disposal........................................47
Keys and Remote Control 48
General information on radio frequencies.....................48
Remote control .......................................48
Replacing a lost key or remote control.......................50
Locks 51
Locking and unlocking ..................................51
Security 55
SecuriLock® passive anti-theft system.......................55
Steering Wheel 58
Adjusting the steering wheel ..............................58
Wipers and Washers 59
Windshield wipers .....................................59
Windshield washers ....................................59
Table of Contents 1
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Lighting 60
Lighting control .......................................60
Instrument lighting dimmer...............................61
Daytime running lamps ..................................61
Turn signal control .....................................62
Interior lamps ........................................62
Windows and Mirrors 63
Power windows .......................................63
Exteriormirrors.......................................64
Interiormirrors .......................................67
Sunvisors...........................................67
Instrument Cluster 68
Gauges .............................................68
Warning lamps and indicators .............................70
Audible warnings and indicators ...........................73
Information Displays 74
Controls.............................................74
Information messages ...................................79
Climate Control 82
Manual heating and air conditioning ........................82
Seats 86
Sitting in the correct position .............................86
Head restraints........................................87
Manual seats .........................................87
Power seats ..........................................89
Auxiliary Power Points 90
Starting and Stopping the Engine 93
Ignition switch ........................................94
Engine block heater ....................................97
2 Table of Contents
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Fuel and Refueling 99
Fuel quality .........................................100
Running out of fuel....................................102
Refueling...........................................102
Fuel consumption .....................................104
Transmission 108
Transmission operation .................................108
Brakes 113
Brakes .............................................113
Hints on driving with anti-lock brakes ......................114
Parking brake........................................114
Traction Control 115
TractionControl™....................................115
Cruise Control 116
Using cruise control ...................................116
Driving Aids 118
Steering ............................................118
Load Carrying 119
Vehicle loading .......................................119
Towing 126
Trailertowing........................................126
Trailer brake controller-integrated .........................131
Wrecker towing ......................................137
Recreational towing ...................................138
Driving Hints 139
Economical driving ....................................141
Floormats..........................................143
Table of Contents 3
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Roadside Emergencies 145
Getting roadside assistance ..............................145
Hazard flasher control..................................147
Fuel pump shut-off ....................................147
Jump-starting the vehicle ...............................148
Customer Assistance 151
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) .......................158
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) .....................158
Fuses 159
Changing a fuse ......................................159
Fuse specification chart ................................160
Maintenance 168
General information ...................................168
Opening and closing the hood ............................169
Under hood overview ..................................170
Engine oil dipstick ....................................171
Engine oil check......................................171
Engine coolant check ..................................172
Automatic transmission fluid check ........................177
Brake fluid check .....................................185
Power steering fluid check ..............................185
Fuel filter...........................................185
Washer fluid check ....................................186
Changing the vehicle battery .............................186
Checking the wiper blades ..............................189
Changing the wiper blades ..............................190
Air filter(s) .........................................190
Adjusting the headlamps ................................191
Changing a bulb ......................................195
Removing a headlamp ..................................195
4 Table of Contents
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Vehicle Care 201
Cleaning products.....................................201
Cleaning the exterior ..................................201
Waxing.............................................203
Repairing minor paint damage ............................203
Cleaning the engine ...................................204
Cleaning the windows and wiper blades .....................204
Cleaning the interior ...................................205
Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens .......206
Cleaning leather seats ..................................207
Cleaning the alloy wheels ...............................208
Vehiclestorage.......................................208
Wheels and Tires 211
Tire care ...........................................213
Using snow chains ....................................232
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...................232
Changing a road wheel .................................239
Technical specifications.................................246
Wheel lug nut torque ..................................246
Capacities and Specifications 248
Engine specifications ..................................248
Engine drivebelt ......................................249
Part numbers ........................................255
Vehicle identification number ............................256
Vehicle certification label ...............................257
Transmission code designation............................257
Accessories 258
Accessories .........................................258
Upfitter controls ......................................259
Table of Contents 5
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Extended Service Plan 261
Audio System 264
AM/FMstereo........................................266
AM/FM/CD with SYNC .................................267
Satellite radio information ...............................269
Auxiliary input jack ...................................272
USB port ...........................................273
SYNC® 275
Pairing your phone for the first time .......................280
911 Assist™ .........................................296
Vehicle Health Report ..................................298
Appendices 327
Scheduled Maintenance 338
Normal scheduled maintenance and log .....................343
Index 354
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to
print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change
specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our
written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2014
6 Table of Contents
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time
to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you
know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when
using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle.
Note: This manual describes product features and options available
throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they
are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may show features as used
in different models, so may appear different to you on your vehicle.
However, the essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable
laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral
part of the vehicle.
Note:This vehicle was sold as an incomplete vehicle by Ford Motor
Company or an authorized Ford dealer and may have since been upfitted
by a vehicle modifier. As a result, some of the options and features on
this vehicle may differ from what we describe in this manual.
This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or
right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat.
A. Right-hand side
B. Left-hand side
A
B
Introduction 7
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Safety alert See Owner’s
Manual
Anti-lock
braking
system
Avoid
smoking,
flames, or
sparks
Battery Battery acid
Brake fluid –
non
petroleum
base
Brake system Cabin air
filter
Check fuel
cap
Child Safety
Door Lock
and Unlock
Child seat
lower anchor
Child seat
tether anchor
Cruise control Do not open
when hot
Engine air
filter
Engine
coolant
Engine
coolant
temperature
Engine oil Explosive gas Fan warning
8 Introduction
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Fasten safety
belt
Front airbag Front fog
lamps
Fuel pump
reset
Fuse
compartment
Hazard
warning
flasher
Heated rear
window
Interior
luggage
compartment
release
Jack
Lighting
control
Low tire
pressure
warning
Maintain
correct fluid
level
Panic alarm Parking aid
system
Parking brake
system
Power
steering fluid
Power
windows front
and rear
Power
window
lockout
Service
engine soon
Side airbag Stability
control
Windshield
defrost and
demist
Windshield
washer and
wiper
Introduction 9
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. Additionally, when your vehicle is in for service or repair,
Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC® Vehicle
Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also
be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used for any
purpose. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
• How fast the vehicle was travelling;
• Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
10 Introduction
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Note:
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, Directions and Information privacy
below). However, parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data recorder information without
obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or where
required by law enforcement, other government authorities or
other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada.
Note:
Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
Data Recorders applies to SYNC® or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving
the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally
provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as latitude and
longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators
to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not
want to disclose this information, do not activate the 911 Assist
feature. See your SYNC® chapter for more information.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC® chapter for
more information.
Introduction 11
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING: Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle
components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Note: Certain components in your vehicle, such as airbag modules,
safety belt pretensioners, and remote control batteries, may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
more information.
FORD CREDIT (U.S. ONLY)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you
acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through
Ford Credit, thank you for your business.
For your convenience, we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well
as help manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit, as well as access to
Account Manager, please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts.
We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft
parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair.
You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for
the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years
of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using
parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this owner’s manual.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications.
12 Introduction
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements
for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance.
During vehicle development, we validate that these parts deliver the
intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for
sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement
parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to your vehicle as
a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered by the Ford
Warranty. For additional information, see the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the warranty
information that is provided to you along with your owner’s manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the Supplementary Restraints System
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Introduction 13
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Manual carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate your vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance
manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s Layout Book and the
Qualified Vehicle Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as pertinent
supplements. For additional information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service at http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/ and
then by selecting “Contact Us” or by phone at 1–877–840–4338.
Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited
Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties. In addition, ambulance
usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which
could lead to fires.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package, it will be indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label is located on the driver’s side door pillar or on the rear
edge of the driver’s door. You can determine whether the ambulance
manufacturer followed Ford’s recommendations by directly contacting
that manufacturer.
14 Introduction
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you
must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and
security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations.
Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this owner’s manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This owner’s manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian
Markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on
units built for Export. See this owner’s manual for all other
required information and warnings.
Introduction 15
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly
in a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consulting your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, or locate
your local St. John Ambulance office by searching for St. John
Ambulance on the internet, or Transport Canada at 1–800–333–0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly restrain children in safety
seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight,
or age
Recommended restraint
type
Infants
or
toddlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg)
or less (generally age four or
younger).
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an infant
carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat).
16 Child Safety
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight,
or age
Recommended restraint
type
Small
children
Children who have outgrown or
no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children
who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than
age four (4) and less than age
twelve (12), and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and
upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer).
Use a belt-positioning booster
seat.
Larger
children
Children who have outgrown or
no longer properly fit in a
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at
least 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended
by child restraint manufacturer).
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug and
low across the hips, shoulder
belt centered across the
shoulder and chest, and seat
back upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local and
state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
See Passenger Airbag ON and OFF Switch in the Supplemental
Restraints System chapter for more information.
Child Safety 17
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your
vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or
utilized, is inappropriate for your child’s height, age or weight, or does
not properly fit the child, may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
18 Child Safety
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: To avoid risk of injury, do not leave children or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for
children
Restraint type
Combined
weight of
child and
child seat
Use any attachment method as
indicated below by X.
Safety belt and top
tether anchor
Safety
belt only
Rear-facing
child seat
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
X
Rear-facing
child seat
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-facing
child seat
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-facing
child seat
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
X
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon
which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See the Seats chapter for information on head restraints.
Child Safety 19
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight (8), a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or
80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when the child is seated without a booster seat.
• Can the child sit all the way
back against their vehicle seat
with knees bent comfortably at
the edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and
shoulder belt.
20 Child Safety
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Types of Booster Seats
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seatback or no head restraint,
a backless booster seat may place your child’s head (as measured at
the tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position with a higher seatback or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back
booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that
adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be
a better choice.
Child Safety 21
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings
compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to
the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The
drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the
child’s hips.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used,
placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster
seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than
this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
22 Child Safety
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats
Use a child safety seat (sometimes
called an infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat) for infants,
toddlers or children weighing
40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants should only use
seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained.
Child Safety 23
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the child seat will be installed in
the upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. See Step 5. This
vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in
a seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
24 Child Safety
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not
twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger
and rear seats. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
Child Safety 25
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
7.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in
the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out).
If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, for example, by pressing
down or kneeling on the child
restraint while pulling up on the
shoulder belt in order to force slack
from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the
extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps to
achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will provide extra help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). See Using
Tether Straps.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side
to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch
(2.5 centimeters) of movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed.
In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for referral
to a Child Passenger Safety Technician.
26 Child Safety
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about
ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have
attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether
anchors:
You can attach the tether directly
to the rear of the front seat.
Child Safety 27
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
1. Adjust the front passenger seat fully forward.
2. Route the child safety seat tether
strap over the back of the front
passenger seat as shown.
3. Clip the tether strap hook to the
seat pedestal at the location shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat
may not be retained properly in the
event of a crash.
4. Adjust the front passenger seat to the full rearward position.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
28 Child Safety
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly
wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
WARNING:
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Safety Belts 29
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front seat occupants, including pregnant women,
should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts.
All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety
belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode (except driver
safety belt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions.
• Safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions.
• Safety belt warning light and chime. See Safety belt warning
light and indicator chime.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash sensors and airbag indicator in the
Supplemental Restraints System chapter.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal or
near-frontal crashes and may deploy in rollovers if the vehicle is
equipped with roll stability control. The safety belt pretensioners at the
front seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly
against the occupant’s body when activated. This helps increase the
effectiveness of the safety belts.
30 Safety Belts
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard safety restraints in your vehicle are combination lap
and shoulder belts.
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
Safety Belts 31
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright
and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips.
The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the
following figure.
Pregnant women should always
wear their safety belts. The lap belt
portion of a combination lap and
shoulder belt should be positioned
low across the hips below the belly
and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of
the shoulder and the center of the
chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNING: After any vehicle crash, the safety belt system at all
passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
WARNING: The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or
any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked
by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the belt and retractor
assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashes.
32 Safety Belts
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode.
The front outboard passenger safety belt has both types of locking
modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster,
is installed in the passenger front seating position. See the Child Safety
chapter.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the safety belt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
Safety Belts 33
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, you can obtain a
safety belt extension assembly from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is on a label located either at the end of
the webbing or on the retractor behind the trim. Also, use the safety belt
extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
do the following:
1. Push the button and slide the
height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure
it is locked in place.
34 Safety Belts
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
SAFETY BELT WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the
driver’s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle’s
ignition is turned on.
Conditions of Operation
If... Then...
The driver safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
SAFETY BELT-MINDER™ (IF EQUIPPED)
This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing
additional reminders that intermittently sound a tone and illuminate the
safety belt warning light when you are in the driver seat and the safety
belt is unbuckled.
If... Then...
You buckle your safety belt
before you switch the ignition
on or less than 1-2 minutes
elapse after you switch the
ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature will not
activate.
Safety Belts 35
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
If... Then...
You do not buckle your safety
belt before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes
elapse after you switch the
ignition...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates
and a warning tone sounds for
6 seconds every 25 seconds, repeating
for about 5 minutes or until you
buckle your safety belt.
The driver safety belt is
unbuckled for about one
minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than
1-2 minutes elapse after you
switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates,
the safety belt warning light
illuminates and a warning tone sounds
for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until
you buckle your safety belt.
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave
the Belt-Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use
the vehicle.
Read Steps1-5thoroughly before proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• All vehicle doors and the hood are closed.
• The driver safety belt is unbuckled.
• The parking lamps and headlamps are off.
36 Safety Belts
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
1. Turn the ignition on. Do not start the engine.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (about one minute).
• You must complete Step 3 within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed,
ending in the unbuckled state.
• After Step 3, the safety belt warning light turns on for three seconds.
4. Within about seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
•
This will switch the feature off for that seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that seating position if it is
currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks,
tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies,
including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters
(if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should
be inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use
in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was
minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage
and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced.
Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, see Cleaning the Interior in the
Vehicle Care chapter.
Safety Belts 37
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk
of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly
wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module, as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses as you could be
seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation as this may result in
serious injury.
38 Supplementary Restraints System
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING:
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to
work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front
passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery
residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example,
baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may
irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries,
contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly
and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries,
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly
to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely
important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the
airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM™
The system flashes the direction indicator lamps and the horn sounds
(intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag
equipped on your vehicle.
The horn and lamps turn off when:
• You press the hazard button.
•
You press the panic button (if equipped) on the remote entry transmitter.
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
Supplementary Restraints System 39
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS
WARNING: Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag
module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
The driver and front passenger
airbags will deploy during significant
frontal and near frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 centimeters) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
•
Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position.
40 Supplementary Restraints System
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts,
it is very important that they continue to sit properly. Properly seated
occupants sit upright, lean against the seat back, and center themselves
on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a crash.
Passenger Airbag ON and OFF Switch (If Equipped)
WARNING: An airbag ON and OFF switch may have been
installed in this vehicle. Before driving, always look at the face of
the switch to be sure the switch is in the proper position in accordance
with these instructions and warnings. Failure to put the switch in a
proper position can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
crash.
Note: The passenger airbag ON and OFF switch may be on vehicles with
no rear seats and a gross vehicle weight rating greater than 8500 pounds
(3856 kilograms). See the Towing chapter for more information.
Supplementary Restraints System 41
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Turning the Passenger Airbag Off
WARNING: If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air
bag switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in
ON, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the
switch, always remove the ignition key from the passenger air
bag ON and OFF switch.
WARNING: An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of
serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag. Rear
facing infant seats should never be placed in the front seats, unless the
passenger airbag is turned off.
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the switch to
off, and hold it in the off position while
removing the key.
2. When the ignition is turned to off, the off
light illuminates briefly, momentarily shuts
off and then turns back on. This indicates
that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Turning the Passenger Airbag Back On
WARNING: The safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to
function together with the airbags in certain types of crashes. When
you turn off your airbag, you not only lose the protection of the airbag,
you also may reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system, which
was designed to work with the airbag. If you are not a person who
meets the requirements stated in the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration or Transport Canada deactivation criteria, turning off
the airbag can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a crash.
42 Supplementary Restraints System
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: If your vehicle has rear seats, always transport
children who are 12 and younger in a rear seating position.
Always use safety belts and child restraints properly. Do not place a
child in a rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is
equipped with an airbag ON and OFF switch and the passenger airbag
is turned off. This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to
the inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the
airbag inflates is substantial.
WARNING: If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger
airbag switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in
ON, have the passenger airbag switch serviced at an authorized dealer
immediately.
The passenger airbag remains off until you turn it back on.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the
switch to on.
2. The OFF light will briefly illuminate
when the ignition is turned on. This
indicates that the passenger airbag is
operational.
The passenger side airbag should always be on (the airbag OFF light
should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets
the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration/Transport Canada deactivation
criteria which follows.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an
airbag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life
threatening injuries, airbags must open with great force, and this force
can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a
front seat occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way
to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the
overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the
Supplementary Restraints System 43
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
protection of safety belts and permits the airbags to provide the
additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your airbag, you are losing the very significant risk reducing
benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the
safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to
work as a safety system with the airbags.
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Deactivation
Criteria (excluding Canada)
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the
risk of injury in a crash. The energy management safety belt is designed
to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if
the airbag is turned off, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is turned on for
any person who does not qualify under the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration deactivation criteria.
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
• the vehicle has no rear seat;
• the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing
infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that
the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat
because:
• the vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or
44 Supplementary Restraints System
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which,
according to his or her physician:
• causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger;
and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a
crash.
Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria (Canada Only)
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the
risk of injury in a crash. The energy management safety belt is designed
to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of
certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if
the airbag is turned off, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a
serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and the heavier the
occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the airbag is turned on for
any person who does not qualify under the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration deactivation criteria.
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition.
Supplementary Restraints System 45
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the
front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or
• the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that,
according to his or her physician:
• poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment
greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
your vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of your
vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which
provide information to the restraints control module. The restraints
control module deploys (activates) the front safety belt pretensioners,
driver airbag and passenger airbag. Based on the type of accident, the
restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above
safety devices plus the crash sensors. The readiness of the safety system
is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not working. See the Instrument
Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required.
46 Supplementary Restraints System
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint
system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains frontal
deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to deploy a
safety device.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate in a
crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it
means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions
(such as crash severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to activate
these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and
near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts)
unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the safety belt pretensioners is to activate in frontal or
near-frontal crashes and may deploy in rollovers if the vehicle is
equipped with roll stability control.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags must be
disposed of by qualified personnel.
Supplementary Restraints System 47
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. The term IC before the radio certification number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater
range. A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around your vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by
other short-distance radio transmissions, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm
systems. If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your
remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press
any button unintentionally.
REMOTE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
If there are problems with the
remote entry system, make sure to
take all remote entry transmitters
with you to the authorized dealer in
order to aid in troubleshooting the
problem.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with the E-Guard Cargo Protection
System™ the remote transmitter unlock command will only unlock the
front doors. The only way to unlock the side or rear cargo doors from
outside the vehicle is with the key.
48 Keys and Remote Control
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete the remote control from your
vehicle. The remote control should operate normally after battery
replacement.
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the
two halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring.
Note: Do not take the rubber cover
and circuit board off the front
housing of the remote entry
transmitter.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on
the battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
PLACE BATTERY
ON OTHER HALF
DO NOT TOUCH
THE TERMINALS
Keys and Remote Control 49
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Car Finder
Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn will sound
and the turn signals will flash. We recommend you use this
method to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Press the button to activate the alarm. Press the button again
or switch the ignition on to deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will operate regardless of the ignition position.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement or additional keys or remote controls from
an authorized dealer. A dealer can program the transmitters to your
vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself. See the Security
chapter for information on programming spare keys.
Reprogramming Your Remote Controls
You must have all remote controls (maximum of four) available before
beginning this procedure. If all remote controls are not present during
programming, the ones missing will no longer operate the vehicle.
Note: Make sure you do not press the brake pedal during this sequence.
To reprogram the remote control:
1. Make sure the vehicle is electronically unlocked.
2. Place the key in the ignition and turn it from lock to off.
3. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between off and on.
Note: The eighth turn must end in the on position.
4. The doors will lock, and then unlock, to confirm that you have
activated the programming mode.
5. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote control.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over.
6. The doors will lock, and then unlock, to confirm that you have
programmed this remote control.
7. Repeat Step 5 to program each additional remote control (up to four).
8. Turn the ignition off after you have finished programming all of the
remote controls.
9. The doors will lock, and then unlock, to confirm that you have exited
the programming mode.
50 Keys and Remote Control
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock
and unlock your vehicle.
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
The power door lock switches are on the driver and front passenger door
panels.
A. Unlock
B. Lock
Remote Control (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control anytime the vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
Press the button to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signals will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control
for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. Disabling
two-stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of
the button. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the unlocking
mode was changed.
Locking the Doors
Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors
are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp and the turn
signals will illuminate if all the doors are closed.
Note: If any door is not closed, the horn will chirp twice and the lamps
will not illuminate.
Memory Lock
If you lock your doors with the power lock control or the remote control while
the sliding door is open, the door will automatically lock after it is closed.
A B
Locks 51
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Autolock and Unlock
Note: Your vehicle comes with this feature disabled.
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all doors are closed,
• the ignition is on,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the vehicle was autolocked, the autounlock feature will unlock all
doors when the driver’s door is opened within 10 minutes of switching
the ignition off.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and Autounlock
These features can be enabled or disabled:
• by your authorized dealer
• through the information display
• using the power door lock procedure.
To enable or disable using the power door locks, do the following:
Note: You will have 30 seconds to complete the procedure.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door lock button three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door lock button three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn will chirp indicating the programming
mode has been entered.
Autolock: Once in programming mode, press the power door unlock
button then the lock button. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
Autounlock: Once in programming mode, press the power door lock
button then the unlock button. The horn will chirp once if autounlock
was deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock
was activated.
6. Turn the ignition off. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.
Note: The autounlock feature can be enabled or disabled independently
of the autolock feature.
52 Locks
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry
system is used to unlock the doors or sound the personal alarm.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if:
• you switch the ignition on
• you press the lock button on the remote control
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The interior lamps will not turn off if:
• you turn them on with the dimmer control
• any door is open.
Rear Cargo Door Lock (If Equipped)
The passenger side rear cargo door
has a lock control mounted on the
inside of the door. Press to unlock
or lock all the doors.
E-Guard Cargo Protection System™ (If Equipped)
The system insures that the side and cargo doors are double locked for
extra security.
System Features
• The system is available with either power or manual door locks.
• The system provides extra security via a double-locked design.
• The cargo doors can only be unlocked from the outside by using the
keys.
• The power unlock feature (if equipped with power door locks) will
only unlock the front doors.
• The system is equipped with an emergency unlock handle installed in
the door inner panel.
A
B
Locks 53
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
System Procedure – Power Door Locks
• Lock the vehicle with the key, manual door lock, remote control or use
the power door lock on the front door trim panel. The front doors are
locked and the cargo doors are double-locked.
• Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or use the power door lock
on the front door. The front doors are unlocked and the cargo doors
remain double-locked.
Note: The only way to unlock the side or rear cargo doors from outside
the vehicle is with the key.
System Procedure – Manual Door Locks
• The front door locks can be locked by using either the key or the
manual door lock.
• In order to activate the system, use the key or the manual door lock
to lock the side and rear cargo doors.
Note: The cargo doors cannot be unlocked using the manual door lock.
54 Locks
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
SECURILOCK® PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote
start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the
same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to
the key when starting the engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine
if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always take
your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
The system is an engine immobilization system. It helps prevent the
engine from starting unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is
used. Using the wrong key may prevent the engine from starting.
A message may appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, a
malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information
display.
Anti-Theft Indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
• When the ignition is off, the indicator will flash once every
two seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning
as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is on, the indicator will glow for three seconds,
then turn off to indicate normal system functionality.
Vehicles without the SecuriLock Passive Anti-theft system behave as
follows:
• When the ignition is off, the indicator will not flash.
• When the ignition is on, the indicator will glow for three seconds to
indicate the engine is enabled.
Security 55
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Automatic Arming
Your vehicle arms immediately after you switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Your vehicle disarms when you switch the ignition on with a coded key.
Replacement Keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer.
The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys
will need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. See an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Key
Note: A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your
vehicle.
You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle.
Only use SecuriLock® keys.
You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See your authorized dealer to have
the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are
not available
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the first coded
key, insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least one
second, but no more than 10 seconds.
56 Security
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
6. Turn the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed
coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition off
and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least one
second, but no more than 10 seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine. The theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and
then go out.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash rapidly. Wait
20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8. Take your vehicle to your
authorized dealer to have the new key programmed if you are still
unsuccessful.
Wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 to program
an additional key.
Security 57
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle
is moving.
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release lever.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position then release the
lever.
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
A. Voice recognition
B. Phone mode
See the SYNC or Navigation System chapter.
CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
See the Cruise Control chapter.
1
2
A
B
ON
OFF
R
E
S
S
E
T
A
C
C
E
L
C
O
A
S
T
ON
OFF
58 Steering Wheel
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note:
Fully defrost the windshield before turning on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are turned off before entering a
car wash.
Note:
Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks
or smears. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to bun out.
Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield.
Rotate the end of the control:
• away from you to increase the
wiper speed
• toward you to decrease the wiper
speed.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out.
Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat.
Press the end of the stalk to
activate the washer.
• A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes
the wipers to swipe three times
with washer fluid.
• A long press and hold will
activate the wipers and washer
fluid for up to 10 seconds.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining
washer fluid.
Wipers and Washers 59
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
LIGHTING CONTROL
A. The first position turns the lamps off.
B. The second position turns on the parking
lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate
lamps and tail lamps.
C. The third position turns the headlamps on.
High Beams
• Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to switch on
the high beams.
• Pull the lever toward you to
switch of the high beams.
Headlamp Flasher
Pull the lever toward you slightly
and release it to flash the
headlamps.
A
B C
60 Lighting
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it becomes discharged, the
dimmer switch will require re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer switch from
the full dim position to the full dome/on position to reset.
Note: Move the control to the full upright position, past detent, to turn
on the interior lamps.
Move the control up or down to
adjust the intensity of the panel
lighting.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The daytime running lamps system does not activate
the tail lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during
low visibility driving conditions. Always remember to turn on your
headlamps at dusk and in all low visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may
result in a collision.
When you switch the ignition to the on position and the lighting control
is in the off or parking lamp position, the daytime running lamps will
turn on whenever the headlamps are off. They turn off only when the
headlamps are on.
Lighting 61
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front and Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps (If Equipped)
The center dome portion of the
lamp, will light when:
• any door is opened
• the panel dimmer control is
moved to the full upright position
past the detent.
The two outer reading lamps, can only be turned on and off at the lamp.
Cargo Lamps
Cargo lamps equipped with an
on/off control will light when:
• doors are closed and the control
is moved to the right ON position
• control is in the middle position
and any door is open
• panel dimmer control is moved to
the full upright position past the
detent
When the control is moved to the left OFF position, it will not illuminate
when you open the doors or move the dimmer control past the detent.
62 Lighting
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle
and do not let them play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press the switch to open the
window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the
window.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several minutes after you turn the
ignition off, or until any door is opened.
AUTO
Windows and Mirrors 63
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while your vehicle is in
motion.
A. Left mirror
B. Off
C. Right mirror
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Foldaway Exterior Mirrors
The mirrors can be manually folded forward or backward. Push the
mirror toward or away from the door window glass. Make sure that you
fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original
position.
Telescoping Mirror (If Equipped)
This feature allows the mirror to
extend approximately 3 inches
(80 millimeters). It is especially
useful when towing a trailer.
B
A
C
64 Windows and Mirrors
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Spotter Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: New spotter mirrors may be stiff, requiring several cycles before
the spotter adjustment effort eases.
On Standard Mirror
You can tilt the spotter mirror up
or down to increase visibility.
Only apply pressure to the center
of the top or bottom edges when
adjusting the mirror.
Note: Do not apply any force to
the left or right edges. This may
damage the mirror.
On Telescoping Mirror
You can tilt the spotter mirror up
or down and also left or right to
increase visibility.
Windows and Mirrors 65
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper
outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They are designed to assist you
by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind
spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the
traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you are going
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
The image of the approaching
vehicle is small and near the inboard
edge of the main mirror when it is
at a distance. The image becomes
larger and begins to move outboard
across the main mirror as the vehicle
approaches (A). The image will
transition from the main mirror and
begin to appear in the blind spot
mirror as the vehicle approaches
(B). The vehicle will transition to
your peripheral field of view as it
leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
A
B
C
66 Windows and Mirrors
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
INTERIOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also
have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or
down and from side to side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror.
Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised
rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are
detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal
reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
Lift the cover to switch on the
lamp.
Windows and Mirrors 67
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GAUGES
Cluster shown in standard measure. Metric similar.
A. Tachometer
B. Fuel gauge
C. Engine coolant temperature gauge
D. Speedometer
E. Battery voltage gauge
F. Information display. See Information displays for more information.
G. Engine oil pressure gauge
Fuel Gauge
Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the
ignition is on). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of
the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
68 Instrument Cluster
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature,
the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant
temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Battery Voltage Gauge:
Indicates the battery voltage when the ignition is in the on position.
If the pointer moves and stays outside the normal operating range, have
the vehicle’s electrical system checked by your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information display Registers the
accumulated distance your vehicle has travelled.
Trip Computer
See Trip A/B in Information Displays.
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See Information Displays.
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle should stay in the normal
operating range. If the needle falls below the normal range, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and check the engine oil level. Add oil if
needed. If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your
authorized dealer.
Instrument Cluster 69
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some lamps will illuminate when you
start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for
further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and
function the same as a warning lamp but do not display when you start
your vehicle.
Airbag – Front
If it fails to illuminate on startup, continues to flash or remains
on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer. A chime will sound when there is a
malfunction in the indicator light.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to have the normal braking
system (without ABS) unless the brake warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Anti-Theft System
Flashes when the SecuriLockt Passive Anti-theft System has
been activated.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
Brake System
It will illuminate when the parking brake is engaged and the
ignition is on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is
not engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake
fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized dealer.
70 Instrument Cluster
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause
brake failure and the risk of personal injury.
Charging System
It will illuminate when the 12–volt battery is not charging
properly. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Check Fuel Cap
Displays when the fuel cap may not be properly installed.
Continued driving with this light on may cause the Service
Engine Soon warning light to come on.
Cruise Control (if equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard
warning flasher is switched on. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb.
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are
driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level.
Note: Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level
being correct. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and
let cool.
Instrument Cluster 71
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Fasten Safety belt
It will illuminate and a chime will sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt.
High Beam
It will illuminate when the headlamp high beam is switched on.
It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level is low or near empty.
Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine running or when driving, check
your tire pressure as soon as possible.
The lamp also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on
to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system
checked by your authorized dealer.
Overdrive Off (if equipped)
It will illuminate when the overdrive function of the transmission
has been turned off. If the light does not illuminate, have the
transmission serviced soon, or damage may occur.
Powertrain Malfunction/Electronic Throttle Control
It will illuminate when a powertrain fault has been detected.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb
and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/
Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the “service engine soon” light will
stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no malfunctions
are present. However, if after 15 seconds the “service engine soon” light
blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
See the Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) testing in the
Fuel and Refueling chapter.
72 Instrument Cluster
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter.
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage
your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING:
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system,
interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Stability Control System
Displays when the AdvanceTrac®/Traction control is active.
If the light remains on, have the system serviced immediately.
Stability Control System Off
It will illuminate when AdvanceTrac®/Traction control has been
disabled by the driver.
Transmission Tow/Haul
It will illuminate when the Tow/Haul feature has been activated.
Refer to the Transmission chapter for transmission function
and operation. If the light flashes steadily, have the system
serviced immediately, damage to the transmission could occur.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Key In Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory
position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off
(the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle.
If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking
brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
Instrument Cluster 73
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving..
Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information
display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is
displayed in the information display.
Base Information Display Controls
Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem, located in the speedometer,
to choose settings and confirm messages. Select or reset the function by
holding the SELECT/RESET stem for more than two seconds.
INFO
TRIPAorB
ALOC On or OFF
AUnLOC On or OFF
TRIP A or B: Registers the distance of individual journeys.
Optional Information Display Controls
Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem, located in the speedometer,
to choose settings and confirm messages. Select or reset the function by
holding the SELECT/RESET stem for more than two seconds.
INFO
TRIPAorB
MILES (km) TO E
XX.X AVG MPG (L/100km)
MPG (L/km)
HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU
HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
74 Information Displays
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• TRIP A or B: Registers the distance of individual journeys.
• MILES (km) TO E: This displays an estimate of approximately how far
you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal
driving conditions. Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling
to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel. Distance to
empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is
based on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value
is not the same as the average fuel economy display. The running
average fuel economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if the
battery is disconnected.
• XX.X AVG MPG (L/100km): Average fuel economy displays your
average fuel economy in miles/gallon or liters/100 km.
• MPG (L/km): This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
System Check and Vehicle Feature Customization
Note: System check and vehicle feature customization is only available
with the optional information display controls.
Note: When returning to the setup menu and a non-English language
has been selected, HOLD RESET FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to
change back to English. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to
change back to English.
Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to get into the setup menu
sequence for the following displays:
SETUP
OIL LIFE
UNITS ENG /
METRIC
press and
hold the
SELECT/RESET
stem
English or Metric
AUTOLOCK
(if equipped)
ON or OFF
AUTOUNLOCK
(if equipped)
ON or OFF
COMPASS ZONE (if equipped)
Information Displays 75
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
SETUP
TBC MODE
(if equipped)
press and
hold the
SELECT/RESET
stem
Electric or EOH
LANGUAGE =
ENGLISH /
SPANISH /
FRENCH
English / Spanish / French
SYSTEM CHECK
RESET FOR
SYSTEM CHECK
press and
hold the
SELECT/RESET
stem
XXX% OIL LIFE
ENGINE HOURS (if enabled)
ENGINE IDLE HOURS
(if enabled)
CHARGING SYSTEM
BRAKE SYSTEM
TBC GAIN = XX.X or NO
TRAILER (if equipped)
TBC GAIN = XX.X or OUTPUT =
////// (if equipped)
XXX MILES TO E
• OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW: This displays the remaining
oil life. An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message
center and according to the recommended maintenance schedule.
USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change,
perform the following:
1. Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem to display OIL LIFE
XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem for two seconds and release
to reset the oil life to 100%.
To change oil life 100% value (if equipped):
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press the
SELECT/RESET stem to change the oil life start value. Each release and
press will reduce the value by 10%.
76 Information Displays
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• UNITS ENG / METRIC: Displays the current units in English or Metric.
• AUTOLOCK: This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when
the vehicle is shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
• AUTOUNLOCK: This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors
when the driver’s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition
being turned off.
• COMPASS (if equipped): Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy. If the compass appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone adjustment
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
map.
2. Press and release the
SELECT/RESET stem to scroll
through the information displays
until the message center displays
HOLD RESET FOR SETUP MENU.
3. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to get into the setup menu.
Repeatedly press it again to scroll through the setup menu until the
message center displays COMPASS ZONE XX.
4. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem for approximately two
seconds to go to the next zone, then release.
5. Press and hold to go up by one zone then release. Repeat this until
you reach the desired zone.
6. Release the SELECT/RESET stem and allow the setup timer to expire
to exit the procedure
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
Information Displays 77
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Compass calibration adjustment
Note: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away
from large metallic objects or structures. Switch off all non-essential
electrical accessories (heated rear window, heater, A/C, map lamps,
wiper, etc.) and make sure all the doors are closed
Note: If the SELECT/RESET stem is pressed during the calibration or
three minutes has elapsed since the beginning of the calibration without
driving the vehicle, the message center reverts back to normal operation
and the CAL will display until a successful calibration is carried out.
1. Press and release the SELECT/RESET stem to scroll through the
information displays until the message center displays HOLD RESET
FOR SETUP MENU.
2. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem to get into the setup menu.
Repeatedly press it again to scroll through the setup menu until the
message center displays HOLD RESET FOR CALIBRATION.
3. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem for approximately two
seconds until the message center enters the compass zone adjustment
mode.
4. Press and hold the SELECT/RESET stem until the message center
displays CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE.
5. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph (5 km/h ) until the
CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE message changes to CALIBRATION
COMPLETED. This may require up to five circles to complete the
calibration.
•
TBC MODE (if equipped): Allows you to choose the trailer brake mode.
• LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH: Allows you to choose
which language the message center will display in.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the SELECT/RESET stem cycles the
message center through each of the language choices.
Press the SELECT/RESET stem to set the language choice when the
language you want appears.
• HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK: The message center will begin
to cycle through the vehicle systems and provide a status of the item
if needed. Some systems show a message only if a condition is
present.
78 Information Displays
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Press the SELECT/RESET stem to acknowledge and remove some
messages from the information display. Other messages will be removed
automatically after a short time. Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
AdvanceTrac® /
Traction Control
Messages
Action / Description
SERVICE
ADVANCETRAC
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac® system has
detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake System
Messages
Action / Description
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL LOW
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the
brake system should be inspected immediately.
Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance
chapter.
CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM
Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
PARK BRAKE
ENGAGED
Displayed when the parking brake is set and
the vehicle is in motion.
Fuel Messages Action / Description
XXX MILES TO E
FUEL LEVEL LOW
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
Information Displays 79
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Maintenance
Messages
Action / Description
ENGINE OIL
CHANGE SOON
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is
between 5% and 0%.
OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%.
OIL LIFE OK displays after you have changed
the oil.
Tire Messages Action / Description
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
Displays when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITOR FAULT
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring
system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE
SENSOR FAULT
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is
malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use.
For more information on how the system
operates under these conditions refer to the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the
Wheels and Tires chapter for more
information. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
80 Information Displays
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Trailer Messages Action / Description
TRAILER BRAKE
MODULE FAULT
Displayed and accompanied by a single chime,
in response to faults sensed by the TBC. Refer
to Trailer towing in the Towing chapter for
more information.
TRAILER
CONNECTED
Displayed when a correct trailer connection
(a trailer with electric trailer brakes) is sensed
during a given ignition cycle.
TRAILER
DISCONNECTED
Displayed when a trailer connection becomes
disconnected, either intentionally or
unintentionally, and has been sensed during a
given ignition cycle. Disregard this status if
your vehicle is not equipped with a factory
installed trailer brake controller. This message
may appear when an aftermarket TBC is used
even when the trailer is connected.
WIRING FAULT ON
TRAILER
Displayed if there are certain faults in the
vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Towing
chapter for more information.
Information Displays 81
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
A. Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your
vehicle. Adjust to select the desired fan speed.
B. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature.
C. Air distribution control: Turn the control to direct airflow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or floor vents. The system can distribute
air through any combination of these vents.
• VENT: Select to distribute air through the instrument panel air vents.
• FLR: Select to distribute air through the floor vents.
• OFF: Select to turn the system off.
• MIX: Select to distribute air through the instrument panel and floor
air vents.
Select to distribute air to the windshield vents and de-mister.
Air distribution to instrument panel and floor vents turn off.
You can use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a
thin covering of ice.
HI
LO
COOL WARM
VENT
FLR
OFF
MIX
FAN
A B C
82 Climate Control
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
A. Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your
vehicle. Adjust to select the desired fan speed.
B. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature.
C. Air distribution control: Turn the control to direct airflow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or floor vents. The system can distribute
air through any combination of these vents.
• MAX A/C: Select to maximize cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on,
and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
• NORM A/C: Select to turn air conditioning compressor on or off. Use
air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance
and efficiency.
• VENT: Select to distribute air through the instrument panel air vents.
• OFF: Select to turn the system off.
• FLR: Select to distribute air through the floor vents.
• MIX: Select to distribute air through the instrument panel and floor
air vents.
Select to distribute air to the windshield vents and de-mister.
Air distribution to instrument panel and floor vents turn off.
You can use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a
thin covering of ice.
HI
LO
COOL WARM
VENT
NORM
A/C
MAX
A/C
OFF
MIX
FLR
FAN
A B C
Climate Control 83
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
REAR FAN SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Controls the volume of air circulated in the rear of your vehicle.
Adjust to select the desired fan speed or switch off.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: You may feel a small amount of air from the floor air vents
regardless of the air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with
the system switched off.
Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere
with the airflow to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the
base of the windshield.
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather,
adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position.
Increase the temperature and fan speed to improve clearing, if required.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest speed setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the highest setting.
3 Select FLR using the air distribution control.
REAR
HI
LO
OFF
84 Climate Control
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Recommended Settings for Heating
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot
settings.
3 Select MIX using the air distribution control.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1 Adjust the fan speed to HI.
2 Adjust the temperature control to COOL.
3 Select MAX A/C using the air distribution control.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1 Adjust the fan speed to the second speed setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the
cold settings.
3 Select NORM A/C using the air distribution control.
Vehicle Stationary for Extended Periods during Extreme High
Ambient Temperatures
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Place the transmission in position P.
3 Select MAX A/C using the air distribution control.
4 Adjust the fan speed to LO.
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
1 Adjust the air distribution control to NORM A/C.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting.
3 Adjust the fan speed to HI.
4 Direct the instrument panel side air vents toward the side
windows.
5 Close the instrument panel vents.
Climate Control 85
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the
seatback reclined too far can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback,
with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seatback as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a crash or during heavy braking or
when stopping suddenly.
When you use them properly, the
seat, head restraint, safety belt and
airbags will provide optimum
protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow
these guidelines:
• Do not recline the seatback more
than 30 degrees from vertical.
• Sit in an upright position with the
base of your spine as far back as
possible.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of
your head and as far forward as possible, remaining comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel.
We recommend a minimum of 10 inches (25 centimeters) between
your breastbone and the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
86 Seats
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can
maintain full control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and
operate the vehicle until the seatback is placed in its proper position.
The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is
in motion.
The front row outboard
non-adjustable head restraints
consist of a trimmed foam covering
over the upper structure of the
seatback. Properly adjust the
seatback to an upright driving or
riding position, so that the head
restraint is positioned as close as
possible to the back of your head.
MANUAL SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver seat or seatback when your
vehicle is moving. This may result in sudden seat movement,
causing loss of control of your vehicle.
WARNING: Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing
the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged.
Seats 87
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Moving the Seats Backward
and Forward (If Equipped)
Recline Adjustment
(If Equipped)
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seat back to its original position, pull on
the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat
may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)
The lumbar support control is located on the inboard side of the driver
seat. Turn the control to adjust your support.
88 Seats
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
POWER SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver seat while the vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden seat movement, causing loss
of control of your vehicle.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press A to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.
Press B to move the seat forward,
backward, up or down.
Press C to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Recline Adjustment (If Equipped)
A B C
Seats 89
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY POWER POINTS
WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the
cigarette lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter
can cause damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: If used when the engine is not running, the battery will discharge.
There may be insufficient power to restart your engine.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power
point. This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volts
DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigarette lighter
element.
Note: Improper use of the power point can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the
battery from being discharged:
• Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is
parked for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be found:
• on the instrument panel
• in the glove box
• behind the driver’s seat on the upper trim panel (if equipped).
90 Auxiliary Power Points
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power
point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since it will defeat
the safety protection design. Doing so my cause the power point to
overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the
150 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The cap should always be closed whenever the power point outlet
is not in use.
Note: Keep the engine running to use the power point.
The 110 volt AC power point outlet is used for powering electrical
devices that require up to 150 watt. Exceeding the 150 watt limit will
cause the power point to cut off the power temporarily to provide
overload protection.
The power point is located on the
instrument panel.
The power point is not designed for the following electric appliances;
they may not work properly:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, compressor-driven refrigerators, etc.
• Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical
equipment, measuring equipment, etc.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply:
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
Auxiliary Power Points 91
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded,
overheated, or shorted. Unplug your device and turn the ignition off then
on for overloading and shorting conditions. Let the system cool off, then
turn the ignition off then on for an overheating condition.
The power point can provide power whenever the ignition is on and the
indicator light is on. The indicator light is located in the top left corner
of the power point.
When the indicator light is:
• on — power point is ready to supply power
• off — power point power supply is off; ignition is not on
• blinking — power point is in fault mode
92 Auxiliary Power Points
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle on dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately.
Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers) after you
connect it. This is because the engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You may disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing
equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field
or radio noise.
Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the engine. If you have
difficulty starting the engine, see Failure to start later in this section.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 93
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
IGNITION SWITCH
Note: Do not store the key in the ignition after the vehicle is turned off
and you have left the vehicle. This could cause a drain on the battery.
A. Accessory: Allows the electrical accessories, such as the radio, to
operate while the engine is not running.
B. Lock: Locks the automatic transmission gearshift lever and allows key
removal.
C. Off: Shuts off the engine and all accessories without locking the
steering wheel.
D. On: All the electrical circuits are operational. Warning lights are
illuminated. This is the key position when driving.
E. Start: Cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed increases, this helps to warm
up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine check the following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the gearshift is in position P.
• Turn the ignition key to the on position.
D
E
C
B
A
94 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2.
Turn the key to the start position. Release the key when the engine starts.
Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it
starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the first try, wait for a short
period and try again.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
follow this procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle Is Stationary
1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P.
2. Turn the key to the off position.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all electrical circuits, warning lamps
and indicators.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes, the ignition and engine
automatically shut down.
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle Is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still
moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort will be required. When the
ignition is switched off, some electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off.
1. Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes
to bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, move the transmission selector lever
to position P and turn the key to the off position.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 95
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only)
Note: Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as
starter damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to off
and wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Note: Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system.
Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and
possible personal injury.
Note: You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the
engine is cold when operating on E85 ethanol.
The starting characteristics of all grades of E85 ethanol make it
unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C).
Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline).
If summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, 0°F to 32°F
(-18°C to 0°C), you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle
or hesitation until the engine has warmed up.
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E85 ethanol,
and neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol nor an engine block
heater is available, adding unleaded gasoline to your tank improves cold
starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate on E85 ethanol
alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.
See Choosing the right fuel in the Fuels and Refueling chapter for
more information on ethanol.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
this checked immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell
exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods,
we recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 centimeters).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
96 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or personal injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are
below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant.
This allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120–volt A/C
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified
by Underwriter’s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association.
This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors; it could
result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and the
heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could
cause an electric shock or fire.
•
Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly
connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving
your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Keep plug terminals clean and free of dirt and corrosion.
• Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before
winter.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 97
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry before use.
To clean them, use a dry cloth.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use.
The system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours of operation. Using the
heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance
and unnecessarily uses electricity.
98 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if
misused or mishandled.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity. This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded container.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never
allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its full
inserted position when refueling.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling
your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel, such as
gasoline, is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of
fuel may not be visible for hours.
Fuel and Refueling 99
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage and a loss of vehicle performance; repairs may not be
covered under warranty.
Choosing the Right Fuel with a Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped)
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 85% ethanol (E-85) in your Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV). If your vehicle is
flex fuel capable, it will have a yellow fuel filler cap placed over the fuel
fill inlet.
Do not use:
• Fuels containing more than 85% ethanol or E-100 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic based additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded-fuel (The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law).
100 Fuel and Refueling
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Use of any fuel other than recommended fuel can cause powertrain
damage, impair the emission control system or cause loss of vehicle
performance. Any damage to a vehicle that is caused by use of fuel not
recommended will not be covered under warranty.
Choosing the Right Fuel (Gasoline Engines)
Use only UNLEADED gasoline or UNLEADED gasoline blended with a
maximum of 15% ethanol in your gasoline vehicle. If your vehicle is a
Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV), it will have a yellow fuel filler cap placed over
the fuel fill inlet.
Do not use:
• Fuels containing more than 15% ethanol or E-85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic based additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded-fuel (The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law).
Note: Use of any fuel other than recommended fuel can cause
powertrain damage, impair the emission control system or cause loss of
vehicle performance. Any damage to vehicle that is caused by use of fuel
not recommended will not be covered under warranty.
Octane Recommendations
Regular unleaded gasoline with a
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87
is recommended. Some stations
offer fuels posted as “Regular” with
an octane rating below 87,
particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87 are
not recommended.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
Fuel and Refueling 101
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, crank time will be a few seconds longer
than normal. With keyless ignition, just start the engine. Crank time
will be longer than usual.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8 liters) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8 liters) may be required.
• The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more information
on the service engine soon indicator, see Warning Lamps and
Indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
REFUELING
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island.
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling.
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle - this is against the law in some places.
• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
• Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling after the fuel pump nozzle
automatically shuts off for the second time. Failure to follow this
will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
Note: Wait at least 10 seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank.
102 Fuel and Refueling
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in personal
injury.
Note: If the fuel filler cap must be replaced, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified fuel filler cap is not used.
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.
Fuel and Refueling 103
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Filling the Tank
The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve
combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a
full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve
is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle
after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the
engine is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low–medium–high) each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click–offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers) of driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a
more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 miles–3000 miles
(3200 kilometers–4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense, frequency of
fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel
economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy as follows:
Standard: Divide miles traveled by gallons used.
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
104 Fuel and Refueling
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in Scheduled Maintenance
Information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft® or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
Fuel and Refueling 105
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for complete emission warranty
information.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions
may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle
consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in
increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
106 Fuel and Refueling
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state, provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. See On-board
Diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the
OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered
not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once the
engine is started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle
is complete. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above
driving cycle will have to be repeated.
Fuel and Refueling 107
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Understanding the Shift Positions of the 5–Speed Automatic
Transmission
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the tow/haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing
fuel usage during coasting or deceleration. When you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from
the accelerator pedal.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
1. Start the engine
2. Press the brake pedal
3. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
1. Come to a complete stop.
2. Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park).
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), your vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
108 Transmission
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), your vehicle can be started and
is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive with Overdrive) with Tow/Haul off
D (Overdrive) with tow/haul off is the normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
D (Drive with Overdrive) with Tow/Haul on
The tow/haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using tow/haul.
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The TOW HAUL indicator light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster.
Tow/haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based
upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return to normal d riving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).
3 (Third)
Transmission starts and operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
Transmission 109
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in (D ) (Drive with Overdrive) or Drive.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brake lamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking the
vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake
prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
The vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) unless the brake
pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with the ignition
in the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse
has blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer
to Fuses chapter.
110 Transmission
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P
(Park):
1. Apply the parking brake, and
turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
lower trim panel under the steering
column. Make sure to not disturb
the wires on the electrical
connector.
3. Locate the brake-shift interlock
solenoid underneath the steering
column.
4. Pull back on the solenoid, and at
the same time, shift the
transmission into N (Neutral).
5. Start the vehicle.
See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Transmission 111
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning
This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent
shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This operation is considered normal
and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery
installed, the strategy must be relearned.
AXLE INFORMATION
Traction-Lok axle (if equipped)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
traction-lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may exhibit
a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed. This is
normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
112 Transmission
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous
grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be
worn out. Have them inspected by an authorized dealer. If your vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have your vehicle inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal
driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does
not contribute to brake noise. See the Vehicle Care chapter for wheel
cleaning instructions.
See the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the
brake system warning light.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry
the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply
steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow your vehicle and
reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to park
(P) and apply the parking brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal and the
area around it for any items or debris that may be obstructing its
movement. If none are found and the condition persists, have your
vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
Anti-Lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops
by keeping the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates when you turn the ignition
on. If the light does not illuminate during start-up, remains on
or flashes, the anti-lock brake system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still effective.
If the brake warning lamp illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Brakes 113
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise
from the system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the transmission is securely latched in park (P).
To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down until the
pedal stops.
The brake warning lamp will illuminate and will remain illuminated until
the parking brake is released.
To release, pull the brake release lever located at the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
114 Brakes
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of
traction. If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose
surfaces, the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
In certain situations (for example, stuck in snow or mud), turning the
traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin
with full engine power. Turn the traction control system off using the
TCS OFF button located on the instrument panel.
System indicator lights and messages
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the Traction
Control System, the stability control light will illuminate steadily.
Verify that the Traction Control System was not manually disabled. If
the stability control light still illuminates steadily, have the system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle
with Traction Control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates the
traction control system.
The traction control off light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and stays on when the traction control system is
turned off or if a problem occurs in the stability system.
Traction Control 115
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot
on the accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic, on
winding roads or when the road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
WARNING: When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed
may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the
brakes. Change down a gear to assist the system in maintaining the set
speed. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more
than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while driving uphill.
The cruise controls are located on
the steering wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
The indicator will turn on in the instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET ACCEL.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
R
E
S
S
E
T
A
C
C
E
L
C
O
A
S
T
ON
OFF
116 Cruise Control
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed
will not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, you will return
to the speed that you previously set.
• Press and hold SET ACCEL to increase or COAST to decrease the
set speed. Release the control when you reach the desired speed.
• Press and release SET ACCEL to increase or COAST to decrease.
The set speed will change in approximately 1 mph (2 km/h)
increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed. Press and release SET ACCEL.
Canceling the Set Speed
Tap the brake pedal. You will not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the ignition off.
Cruise Control 117
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(If the fluid level is below the MIN line mark on the reservoir).
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX line
mark, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire.
• uneven tire wear.
• loose or worn suspension components.
• loose or worn steering components.
• improper steering alignment.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
118 Driving Aids
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading – With and Without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR
XXX lb.” for maximum payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control
and vehicle rollover.
Load Carrying 119
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position. The total load on each axle
must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide provided by your authorized dealer.
120 Load Carrying
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position.
The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
Load Carrying 121
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
122 Load Carrying
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
Load Carrying 123
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to
carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends
average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh approximately
30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5
x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have enough load
capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x
13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
124 Load Carrying
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from
the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been
planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with
the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags
of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement
to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry
that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg -
(2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kg. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove
3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position.
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and
Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Load Carrying 125
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Note: For information on electrical items such as fuses or relays, see the
Fuses chapter.
The load capacity of your vehicle is designated by weight not volume.
You may not necessarily be able to use all available space when loading
your vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places extra load on the engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires, and suspension. Inspect these components before, during
and after towing.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when
driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side
trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight.
• Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or
shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. You can
find more information about proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing under Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter.
You can also find information in the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized dealer.
126 Towing
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Note: Calculate the maximum trailer weight for all cutaway vehicles by
subtracting the weight of your vehicle (including incomplete vehicle
weight and payload, which includes second unit body weight, cargo and
passengers) from the gross combined weight. Otherwise, maximum
trailer weight is 10000 pounds (4536 kilograms).
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration
listed in the chart below.
Note: Make sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area. Do not
exceed 60 feet
2
(5.57 meters
2
) trailer frontal area.
Note: Exceeding this limitation may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low
aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance
and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1000 feet (300 meters) starting at the 1000 foot (300 meter)
elevation point.
Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a
specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this
specified weight, as your vehicle’s electrical system may not include the
wiring connector needed to use electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is
less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your vehicle
configuration on the following chart.
To calculate the maximum loaded trailer weight for your vehicle:
1. Start with the gross combined weight rating for your vehicle model
and axle ratio. See the following chart.
2. Subtract all of the following that apply to your vehicle:
• Vehicle curb weight
• Hitch hardware weight, such as a draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing
• Driver weight
• Passenger(s) weight
• Payload, cargo and luggage weight
• Aftermarket equipment weight.
3. This equals the maximum loaded trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load figures into the payload for your vehicle.
Reduce the total payload by the final trailer tongue weight.
Towing 127
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Consult an authorized dealer to determine the maximum trailer weight
allowed for your vehicle if you are not sure.
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR
Maximum trailer
weight
E-350 Cutaway single rear wheel
5.4L 4.10 13000 lb (5896 kg) 8000 lb (3629 kg)
6.8L 4.10 18500 lb (8391 kg) 10000 lb (4536 kg)
E-350 Cutaway dual rear wheel
5.4L 4.10 13000 lb (5897 kg) 7700 lb (3493 kg)
6.8L 4.10 18500 lb (8391 kg) 10000 lb (4536 kg)
E-350 Stripped chassis 138–inch wheelbase
5.4L 4.10 13000 lb (5897 kg) 8400 lb (3810 kg)
6.8L 4.10 18500 lb (8391 kg) 10000 lb (4536 kg)
E-350 Stripped chassis 158–inch and 176–inch wheelbase
5.4L 4.10 13000 lb (5897 kg) 8300 lb (3765 kg)
6.8L 4.10 18500 lb (8391 kg) 10000 lb (4536 kg)
E-450 Cutaway
5.4L 4.56 14050 lb (6373 kg) 8500 lb (3856 kg)
6.8L 4.56 22000 lb (9979 kg) 10000 lb (4536 kg)
E-450 Stripped chassis
5.4L 4.56 14050 lb (6373 kg) 9200 lb (4173 kg)
6.8L 4.56 22000 lb (9979 kg) 10000 lb (4536 kg)
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your
scheduled maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency
gives you.
For load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety
Compliance label and for instructions on calculating your vehicle’s load,
refer to Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter.
128 Towing
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your
vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a Trailer Towing Package
and 7–Pin Connector)
When attaching the trailer wiring
connector to your vehicle, only use
a proper fitting connector that
works with the vehicle and trailer
functions. If your vehicle has a
trailer towing package, it may have
a 7–pin connector. Some connectors
may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper
wiring connector and works correctly with your vehicle.
Color Function
1. Yellow Left turn signal and stop lamp
2. White Ground (-)
3. Blue Electric brakes
4. Green Right turn signal and stop lamp
5. Orange Battery (+)
6. Brown Running lights
7. Grey Reverse lights
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the
axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the total trailer weight is on the
tongue.
Weight-Distributing Hitches
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight-distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and
could result in serious personal injury.
Towing 129
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use
the following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle’s front wheel opening
on the fender. This is H1.
3. Securely attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle without the
weight-distributing bars connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle’s front wheel opening
on the fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight-distributing bars so that
the height of your vehicle’s front wheel opening on the fender is
approximately halfway between H1 and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward your
vehicle. If not, adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat
Steps 2–6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely attaches and locks onto the
hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake controls as required by
law or the trailer manufacturer.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle’s braking system operation is at
the gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight
rating.
130 Towing
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control
of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds
(680 kilograms) when loaded.
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
WARNING: The Ford TBC has only been verified to be
compatible with trailers having electric-actuated drum brakes
(one to four axles) and some electric-over-hydraulic (EOH) brakes. It
will not activate hydraulic surge-style trailer brakes. It is the
responsibility of the customer to ensure that the trailer brakes are
adjusted appropriately, functioning normally and all electric connections
are properly made. Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle
control, crash or serious injury.
When used properly, the trailer brake controller assists in smooth and
effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric or
electric-over-hydraulic brakes with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
The controller user interface consists of the following:
A. + and - (Gain adjustment buttons): Pressing these buttons adjusts
the controller’s power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. You
can increase the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer braking) or
decrease it to 0 (no trailer braking). Pressing and holding a button raises
or lowers the setting continuously. The gain setting displays in the
message center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
B
A
Towing 131
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
The controller shows gain setting, output bar graph, and trailer
connectivity status in the information display. They appear in the
information display as follows:
• TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER: Shows the current gain setting
during a given ignition cycle and when adjusting the gain. This also
displays if you use the manual control lever or make gain adjustments
with no trailer connected.
• TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT=//////:Displays when you push
your vehicle’s brake pedal, or when you use the manual control. Bar
indicators illuminate in the information display to indicate the amount
of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output;
six bars indicate maximum output.
• TRAILER CONNECTED: Displays when the system senses a
correct trailer wiring connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes)
during a given ignition cycle.
• TRAILER DISCONNECTED: Displays, accompanied by a single
audible chime, when the system senses a trailer connection and then
a disconnection, either intentional or unintentional, during a given
ignition cycle. It also displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault occurs
causing the trailer to appear disconnected. This message can also
display if you use the manual control lever without a trailer
connected.
B. Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to turn on
the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle’s brakes. See
the following Procedure for adjusting gain section for instructions on
proper use of this feature. If you use the manual control while the brake
is also applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent
to the trailer brakes.
• Stop lamps: Using the manual control lever illuminates both the
trailer brake lamps and your vehicle brake lamps except the center
high-mount stop lamp, if you make the proper electrical connection
to the trailer. Pressing your vehicle brake pedal also illuminates both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
132 Towing
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a traffic-free environment at
speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
The gain setting sets the trailer brake controller for the specific towing
condition. You should change the setting as towing conditions change.
Changes to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road
conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking assistance
while making sure the trailer wheels do not lock when using the brakes.
Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition,
functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to
the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric or electric-over-hydraulic
brakes, TRAILER CONNECTED appears in the information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -) buttons to increase or decrease
the gain setting to the desired starting point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a
good starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at
a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control
lever completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated by squealing tires, reduce the
gain setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the gain setting.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a point just below
trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock-up
may not be attainable even with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Explanation of Information Display Warning Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to
determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred. However, your Ford
warranty does not cover this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT: Displays in response to faults
sensed by the trailer brake controller, accompanied by a single chime. If
this message appears, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair. The controller may still function, but
performance may be degraded.
Towing 133
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER: Displays when there is a short circuit
on the electric brake output wire. If the WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER
message displays, accompanied by a single chime, with no trailer
connected, the problem is with your vehicle wiring between the trailer
brake controller and the 7–pin connector at the bumper. If the message
only displays with a trailer connected, the problem is with the trailer
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for assistance. This can be a short to
ground (such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage (such as a pulled pin
on trailer emergency breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes may be
drawing too much current.
Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer brake controller without
consulting the Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may result.
• Adjust gain setting before using the trailer brake controller for the
first time.
• Adjust gain setting, using the procedure above, whenever road,
weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions change from when
the gain was initially set.
• Only use the manual control lever for proper adjustment of the gain
during trailer setup. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway,
could cause instability of trailer or tow vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The trailer brake
controller does not provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels.
Trailer wheels can lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced
stability of trailer and tow vehicle.
• The trailer brake controller is equipped with a feature that reduces
output at vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) so trailer and
vehicle braking is not jerky or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your vehicle’s brake pedal, not the
controller.
• The controller interacts with the brake control system and powertrain
control system of your vehicle to provide the best performance on
different road conditions.
• Your vehicle’s brake system and the trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing the gain setting on the
controller does not affect the operation of your vehicle’s brakes
whether you attach a trailer or not.
• When you turn the engine off, the controller output is disabled and
the display and module shut down. The controller module and display
turn on when you turn the ignition on.
• The trailer brake controller is only a factory-installed or
dealer-installed item. Ford is not responsible for warranty or
performance of the controller due to misuse or customer installation.
134 Towing
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the
vehicle’s tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system
resulting in a fire. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible for
assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical
equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of your
vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place
the gearshift in position P to aid engine and transmission cooling and
to help air conditioning performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The
speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on
long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not
apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less
effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow/Haul
feature, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking
and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel
economy and transmission cooling.
• If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac™ with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering maneuvers with a heavily loaded
trailer. This is normal. Turning the corner at a slower speed while
towing may reduce this tendency.
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly conditions,
at the gross combined weight rating (or any combination of these
factors), consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant
Towing 135
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
(if the axle is not already filled with it). See the Capacities and
Specifications chapter for the lubricant specification.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate
stops and brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from
traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels.
(Chocks not included with vehicle.)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare
tire. A “temporary” spare tire is different in size (diameter or width),
tread-type (All-Season or All-Terrain) or is from a different manufacturer
than the road tires on your vehicle. Consult information on the tire label
or Safety Compliance label for limitations when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into
the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from
the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 centimeters)
above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle submerges in
water. Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant, which does
not normally require checking or changing unless it is leaking or other
axle repair is required.
136 Towing
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment
to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company
has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle damage may
occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air dam, we recommend using wheel
lift or flatbed equipment if towing from the front. This prevents damage
to the air dam.
Towing 137
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all
wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission
configuration) under the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in position N. See Automatic transmission in
the Transmission chapter if you cannot move the transmission into
N.
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle. See the Climate
Control chapter.
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing, such
as towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed these
guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission.
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as vehicle or
transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle
with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a car-hauling
trailer. Otherwise, you cannot tow your vehicle.
138 Towing
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
PREPARING TO DRIVE
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for
cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may
handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload your
vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at slower speeds,
avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping
distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Over-loading or loading
the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability and
contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger
car.
Vehicle stability and handling
This van or wagon, like any vehicle designed to carry very heavy loads,
must be driven differently from a passenger car. The extra weight can
affect stopping distance and maneuverability. The higher center of
gravity and other features may reduce the ability to make abrupt
maneuvers and may increase the risk of rollover compared to a
passenger car. Do not place any loads on the roof of passenger wagons.
This raises the center of gravity, which increases the risk of rollover.
When loading your wagon, passengers should fill the front rows of seats
Driving Hints 139
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
first. Do not exceed the weight limits specified on the certification label.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover or personal
injury.
The van should be operated by an experienced driver. An organization
that owns a 15–passenger van should select one or two experienced
drivers to drive the van on a regular basis. These drivers will gain
valuable experience handling the van. This experience will help make
each trip safer.
The van should be operated at a safe speed which, in some conditions,
may be less than the posted speed limit.
Further, all occupants should be properly restrained. Most people killed
in rollover crashes were unbelted. Occupants can dramatically reduce
their risk of being killed or seriously injured in a rollover crash by simply
using their seat belts. Organizations that own 15–passenger vans should
have a written seat belt use policy. Drivers should be responsible for
enforcing the policy.
Emergency Maneuvers
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
140 Driving Hints
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for approximately 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unique driving characteristics. Avoid driving too fast during the first
1000 miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed frequently and change up
through the gears early. Do not labor the engine. Do not tow during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel
economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
Driving Hints 141
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
There are also some things you may not want to do because they may
reduce your fuel economy:
• Sudden or hard accelerations.
• Rev the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for
every 400 pounds [180 kilograms] of weight carried).
• Add particular accessories to your vehicle (e.g.; bug deflectors,
rollbars or light bars, running boards, ski racks).
• Drive with the wheels out of alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Do not drive through flowing or deep water as you
may lose control of your vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.
142 Driving Hints
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Before driving through standing water, check the depth. Never drive
through water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel hubs.
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. Your
brake performance and traction may be
limited. After driving through water and as
soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the
foot well of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always make sure that the floor mats are properly
attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied
with your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly secured to both
retention posts to make sure mats do not shift out of position.
WARNING: Never place floor mats or any other covering in the
vehicle foot well that cannot be properly secured to prevent them
from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Driving Hints 143
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never place floor mats or any other covering on top
of already installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on
top of vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other
covering. Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the
pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
WARNING: Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis.
Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been
removed for cleaning or replacement.
WARNING: Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are
loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING: Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
attachment instructions can potentially cause interference with
pedal operation causing a loss of vehicle control.
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
144 Driving Hints
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary Roadside Assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner’s Manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• A flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility).
• Fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters)
of gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9 liters) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Fuel delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing – Ford eligible vehicles will be towed to an authorized dealer
within 35 miles (56.3 kilometers) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 kilometers) from the
disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 miles (56.3 kilometers).
Roadside Assistance will include up to $200 coverage for a towed trailer
if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized
dealer. If the towing vehicle is operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside services.
Roadside Emergencies 145
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the owner’s manual
portfolio in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56.3 kilometers). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers
will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance
Canadian clients who require roadside assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance
For your convenience, you may complete the roadside assistance
identification card found in the centerfold of this warranty guide and
retain for future reference.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. If you require more information, please refer to the coverage
section of your warranty guide, call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006 or
visit our website at www.ford.ca.
Sykes Assistance Services Corporation administers the Roadside
Assistance program. You must receive covered services in Canada or the
continental United States. Coverage extends to vehicles that use public,
non-seasonal, annually traveled roadways. Roadside Assistance coverage
does not extend to vehicles involved in cross-country driving, logging,
autocross and any other form of off-road use. Well maintained roads and
surfaces help ensure safe travel for the supplier, and allow their
representatives to perform service as per the standard operating
procedures.
In Remote Locations
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by road to the nearest
authorized dealership, transportation by rail or water may be necessary.
The program covers a tow to the dock or rail terminal and also to the
dealership at the end of the trip. For rail or water transportation,
however, contact your authorized dealer to confirm if you are eligible for
additional coverage before you authorize or pay for the service. Call the
Ford Roadside Assistance at 1-800-665-2006 for additional information.
146 Roadside Emergencies
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
operate when the ignition is in any
position or if the key is not in the
ignition.
• Press the flasher control to flash
all front and rear direction
signals.
• Press the flasher control again to turn them off.
Use it when your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
Fuel Shutoff
WARNING: Failure to inspect and, if necessary, repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by
an authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle includes a fuel
pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine. Not every
impact will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your
vehicle by doing the following:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable fuel pump.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle after a fuel shutoff, the
vehicle makes sure that various systems are safe to restart. Once your
vehicle determines that the systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not restart after your third
attempt, contact an authorized dealer.
Roadside Emergencies 147
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed
to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle.
Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting to
push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may exhibit a combination of firm and soft shifts. This
operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability
of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully
update transmission operation.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
1. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
2. Check all battery terminals. Remove the positive terminal cover (if
equipped) and any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery
cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
3. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
148 Roadside Emergencies
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor or fuel injection
system.
Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at a
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
4
2
1
3
Roadside Emergencies 149
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Removing the Jumper Cables
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
4
1
3
2
150 Roadside Emergencies
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training,
equipment or both, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the
warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing Address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.fordowner.com.
These are some of the items that can be found online:
• U.S. Dealer Locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Manuals
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
Customer Assistance 151
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 1C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
In order to help serve you better, please have the following information
available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
152 Customer Assistance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18000 mi (29 000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
Customer Assistance 153
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resorting to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services
You Need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting
before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within 40 days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound
by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where
all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in
the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE
decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the
decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
154 Customer Assistance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION or ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA
ONLY)
This pertains to vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In
those cases, where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle
service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in
an impartial third party mediation or arbitration program administered by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straightforward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer
Relationship Center.
Customer Assistance 155
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford
of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern
Mariana Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin
Islands, please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:
(800) 841-FORD (3673)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
156 Customer Assistance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number of Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require
additional assistance or clarification, please contact the
respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Customer Assistance 157
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
A French owner’s manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htm
158 Customer Assistance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the
specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire.
If electrical components in your
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — Natural Natural
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue Yellow Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural Black Black
15
Fuses 159
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a dual battery, disconnecting the
primary under-hood battery does not remove power from all circuits.
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to
Changing the Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
1 HC micro relay Powertrain control module
2 HC micro relay Starter solenoid
3 HC micro relay Wiper
160 Fuses
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
4 HC micro relay Trailer tow battery charge
5 HC micro relay Fuel pump
6 HC micro relay Trailer tow park lamp
7 HC micro relay Auxiliary switch #4
8 HC micro relay Auxiliary switch #3
9 HC micro relay Modified vehicle and stripped
chassis run/start
10 — Not used
11 — Not used
12 40A** Modified vehicle and stripped
chassis run/start
13 30A** Starter solenoid relay
14 40A** Run start relay
15 40A** Modified vehicle and stripped
chassis battery
16 50A** Auxiliary air conditioning blower
17 50A** Trailer tow battery charge, Trailer
tow park feed
18 30A** Electric trailer brake, Trailer brake
controller
19 30A** Auxiliary switch #1
20 30A** Auxiliary switch #2
21 — Not used
22 — Not used
23 G8VA relay Air conditioning clutch
24 G8VA relay Horn relay (stripped chassis)
25 HC micro relay Run/start
26 — Not used
27 — Not used
28 20A* Back-up lamp
29 10A* Air conditioning clutch
30 10A* Brake on/off switch
Fuses 161
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
31 10A* Cluster battery (stripped chassis)
32 50A** Blower motor
33 40A** Anti-lock brake system pump
34 20A** Stripped chassis horn
35 40A** Powertrain control module relay
36 20A** Ignition switch (stripped chassis)
37 G8VA relay Trailer tow stop — left turn signal
38 G8VA relay Trailer tow stop — right turn signal
39 G8VA relay Back up lamp
40 ISO relay Blower motor
41 — Not used
42 15A* Diagnostic connector (stripped
chassis)
43 20A* Fuel pump
44 10A* Auxiliary switch #3
45 15A* Auxiliary switch #4
46 10A* Powertrain control module keep
alive power, Canister vent,
Powertrain control module relay coil
47 40A** Anti-lock brake system coil
48 20A** Trailer tow stop lamp/turn signal
49 30A** Wiper motor
50 — Not used
51 20A** Cutaway
52 10A* Stripped chassis and modified
vehicle run/start relay coil
53 10A* Anti-lock brake system run/start
feed
54 10A* Fuel pump relay coil
55 — Not used
56 — Not used
57 20A* Trailer tow park lamp
162 Fuses
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
58 15A* Trailer tow backup lamp
59 — Not used
60 — One-touch integrated start (diode)
61 — Not used
62 HC micro relay Auxiliary switch #2
63 30A** Trailer tow battery charge
64 — Not used
65 20A** Power point 2 (glove box)
66 20A** Power point 3 (cutaway B+)
67 20A** Power point 1 (instrument panel)
68 50A** Modified vehicle
69 — Not used
70 30A** Stripped chassis
71 — Not used
72 20A** Cigar lighter / Power point
73 — Not used
74 30A** Power seat
75 20A* Vehicle power 1, Powertrain control
module power
76 20A* Vehicle power 2, Powertrain control
module – emission related
powertrain components
77 10A* Vehicle power 3, Powertrain control
module – general powertrain
components
78 15A* Vehicle power 4, Fuel pump relay
coil
79 10A* Vehicle power 5, Transmission
80 10A* Cluster run/start (stripped chassis)
81 — Not used
82 — Not used
83 — Fuel pump (diode)
Fuses 163
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
84 — Not used
85 HC micro relay Auxiliary switch #1
* Mini fuses ** A1S fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a dual battery, disconnecting the
primary under-hood battery does not remove power from all circuits.
The fuse panel is located to the left of the brake pedal and mounted
onto the lower left cowl panel. Remove the fuse panel cover to access
the fuses.
To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller tool provided on the inside of the
fuse panel cover.
164 Fuses
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
1 30A Inverter B+
2 15A Not used (spare)
3 15A Not used (spare)
4 30A Not used (spare)
5 10A Passenger compartment fuse panel,
Brake-shift interlock
6 20A Turn signal, Hazard, Stop lamps
7 10A Left low beam
8 10A Right low beam
9 15A Courtesy lamps
10 15A Switch illumination
11 10A Not used (spare)
Fuses 165
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
12 7.5A Not used (spare)
13 5A Mirrors
14 10A SYNC, Global positioning system
module
15 10A Not used (spare)
16 15A Not used (spare)
17 20A Door locks
18 20A Not used (spare)
19 25A Not used (spare)
20 15A Diagnostic connector (except
stripped chassis)
21 15A Not used (spare)
22 15A Park lamps, License plate lamps
23 15A High beams
24 20A Horn (except stripped chassis)
25 10A Demand lighting
26 10A Cluster (except stripped chassis)
27 20A Ignition switch feed
28 5A Audio mute (start)
29 5A Cluster (except stripped chassis)
30 5A Not used (spare)
31 10A Not used (spare)
32 10A Restraints module
33 10A Trailer brake controller
34 5A Not used (spare)
35 10A Cutaway run/start
36 5A Passive anti-theft system radio
frequency module
37 10A Climate control, Stripped chassis
instrument panel #1 run/start
38 20A Not used (spare)
166 Fuses
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp
rating
Protected components
39 20A Radio
40 20A Not used (spare)
41 15A Radio, Switch illumination,
Automatic dimming rear view
mirror, Inverter
42 10A Auxiliary switch
43 10A Stripped chassis instrument panel
connector #1
44 10A Trailer tow battery charge relay
45 5A Wipers, Stripped chassis Engine
connector 3
46 7.5A Passenger airbag deactivation
indicator
47 30A circuit
breaker
Windows accessory delay
48 Relay Delayed accessory
Fuses 167
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness
and resale value. There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers
who are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We
believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your
vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide Scheduled Maintenance
Information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty
information to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key (if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage or personal
burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to position P (Park) .
2. Block the wheels.
168 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push the auxiliary latch, located in
the center top of the grille, to the left in order to release the hood.
3. Lift the hood and secure it with the prop rod.
Maintenance 169
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
A. Battery
B. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
C. Engine oil filler cap
D. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
E. Air filter assembly
F. Engine oil dipstick
G. Power steering fluid reservoir
H. Brake fluid reservoir
I. Engine coolant reservoir
J. Power distribution box
A B C D E F G H I J
170 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A.–MIN
B. – MAX
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick. See the
Under Hood Overview in this chapter for location of dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between the MIN
and MAX marks (depending on application), the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough oil
to raise the level within the lower and upper holes or within the
MIN-MAX range.
Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
A B
Maintenance 171
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the engine oil level dipstick or the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Note: Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above
the MAX mark may cause engine damage.
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the
American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this
trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers.
1. Check the engine oil level.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add engine oil
that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications for
more information. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to
pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the Engine Coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information.
Note: Make sure that the level is at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the
COLD FILL RANGE.
If the level is below the COLD FILL RANGE, add coolant immediately.
See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter.
172 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
The coolant concentration should be maintained within 48% to 50%,
which equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Robinair Coolant and Battery Refractometer
75240. We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test
strips for measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the FULL COLD
mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants or additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems. This
damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make
sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may
harm engine and cooling system components and may void the
warranty.
Maintenance 173
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• In case of emergency, a large amount of water without engine coolant
may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this
instance, the cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned with
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush, and refilled with engine
coolant as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can
cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with
alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can
cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the
cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification. See
Capacities and Specifications for more information.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the
overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may
cause engine damage.
174 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat
protection. Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the
corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use
prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load and
terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine coolant temperature gauge
will move to the red (hot) area and:
The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate.
The service engine soon indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be restarted. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
Maintenance 175
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When Fail-Safe Mode is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases
the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
176 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK
Checking Automatic Transmission Fluid (If Equipped)
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 20 miles [30 kilometers]). If your vehicle has
been operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic
during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off
for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 kilometers) or until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the engine running, parking brake engaged and your foot on the
brake pedal, move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges.
Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Maintenance 177
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Low Fluid Level
Do not drive the vehicle if there is no indication of fluid on the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is above 50°F (10°C).
178 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Correct Fluid Level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 150°F-170°F (66°C-77°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 50°F (10°C). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
Maintenance 179
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating
temperature (150°F-170°F [66°C-77°C]).
The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature
(50°F-95°F [10°C-35°C]).
180 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
High Fluid Level
Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
H
C
Maintenance 181
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Adjusting Automatic Transmission Fluid Levels
Note: Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
Note: An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
Note: Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments
or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick. Refer to the Technical
Specifications table in the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250 ml) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
182 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by an authorized
dealer.
Maintenance 183
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter
The TorqShift® automatic
transmission is equipped with a
serviceable transmission fluid filter
located inside the transmission
bottom pan.
Refer to your Scheduled
Maintenance Information for
service intervals for automatic
transmission fluid and transmission
filter.
For transmission filter maintenance,
see your authorized dealer.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
All universal joints and slip joints are lubricated for life - no grease
fittings. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints
equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will be necessary.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
184 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
WARNING: For E-350 and E-450 vehicles with the Hydro-Boost
Brake System, do not press the brake pedal after the engine has
been turned off. Pressing the brake pedal after the engine has been
turned off will give a false power steering fluid level reading.
Note: Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid
level (if the fluid level is below the MIN line on the reservoir).
Note: Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX line,
as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
Check the power steering fluid at the appropriate intervals. Refer to the
scheduled maintenance information.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines on the reservoir. Do not add fluid if the level is in this
range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to the technical
specifications table in the Capacities and Specifications chapter for the
proper fluid type.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
Maintenance 185
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid
that meets Ford specifications. See the technical specifications chart in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING: This vehicle may be equipped with more than one
battery, removal of cable from only one battery does not
disconnect the vehicle electrical system. Be sure to disconnect cables
from all batteries when disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property damage.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
186 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after
the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the
vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional water during its life of
service.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
For information on transmission operation after the battery has been
disconnected, refer to Automatic transmission operation in the
Driving chapter.
Maintenance 187
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Dual Batteries (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a frame-mounted battery located on
the passenger side frame rail, behind the front passenger door. This
battery is connected in parallel with the battery in the engine
compartment. Both batteries are used to start the vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the ethanol
content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance. To begin
this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy along with the ethanol content
for flexible fuel vehicles.
• Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
• For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are operating on E85, you may
experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content have been
relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
188 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade
to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water
applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
L
E
A
D
RETURN
RECYCLE
Maintenance 189
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
To replace the wiper blades:
1. Fold back the wiper arm and
position the wiper blade at a right
angle to the wiper arm.
2. To remove the wiper blade, press
the retaining clip (A) to disengage
the wiper blade, then pull the blade
down toward the windshield to
remove it from the arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade on the arm and press it into place until a
click is heard.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
AIR FILTER CHECK
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. See Motorcraft® Part Numbers in the Capacities and
Specifications chapter.
See Scheduled Maintenance Information for the appropriate intervals
for changing the air filter element.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
A
190 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Changing the Air Filter Element
1. Disconnect the fresh air inlet
tube from the radiator support.
2. Open the clamp that secures the
two halves of the air filter housing
together.
3. Carefully separate the two
halves of the air filter housing.
4. Remove the air filter element
from the housing.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly
seated.
6. Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp.
7. Connect the fresh air inlet tube to the radiator support.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, an authorized dealer should
check the alignment of your headlamps.
Maintenance 191
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Vertical and Horizontal Aim Adjustment (Sealed Beam Headlamps)
The headlamps on your vehicle are intended to be aimed using
mechanical aimers. If mechanical aimers are used and the cross-car sight
line is in any way blocked, set the legs of the universal adaptor all to the
same setting, such that the cross-car sight line is no longer blocked, per
the instructions for the brand of mechanical aimer used. You can also
aim the headlamps visually using the procedure below.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters) away
from a vertical plain surface. Check your headlamp alignment at night or
in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern.
• (A) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (B) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (C) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (D) Horizontal reference line
• (E) Vertical reference line for the
center of the headlamp
• (F) Vertical reference line for the
center of the vehicle
2. The center of the headlamp is marked either on the lens (a circle or
cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp (mark or
feature). Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the
ground (B) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long horizontal line on the
wall or screen (D) at this height (masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps
and open the hood.
4. Locate the high intensity area of
the beam pattern and place the top
edge of the intensity zone even with
the horizontal reference line (D). If
the top edge of the high intensity
area is not even with the horizontal
line, follow the next step to adjust
it.
B
D
E
F
A
C
192 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
5. Locate the vertical adjuster (A)
for each headlamp. Turn the
adjuster control either clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the
vertical aim of the headlamp.
6. In addition to the horizontal line
marked in step 2, a pair of vertical
lines (E) must be marked at the
center line of the headlamps on the
wall or screen.
7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam
pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the
vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If the left
edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line, follow
the next step to adjust it.
8. Locate the horizontal adjuster (B) for each headlamp. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to place the left edge of the high intensity
area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under
adjustment.
Vertical Aim Adjustment (Aerodynamic Headlamps)
The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted. Your
vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
A
B
Maintenance 193
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• (A) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (B) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (C) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (D) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 millimeter circle on the
lens) to the ground and mark an
8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam
will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the
horizontal reference line.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
the back of each headlamp, then
use a long Phillips #2 screwdriver to
turn the adjuster either
counterclockwise or clockwise in
order to adjust the vertical aim of
the headlamp. The upper edge of
the light pattern should align with
the horizontal reference line.
6. Repeat step 3–5 for the other
headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
C
A
B
D
194 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
These are examples of acceptable condensation:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens.
These are examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp
water leak):
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs (Aerodynamic)
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
alcohol before being used.
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the
hood.
Maintenance 195
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
2. Remove the three screws from
the headlamp assembly and pull the
assembly straight out.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector by squeezing the release
tab and pushing the connector
forward, then pulling it rearward.
4. Remove the bulb assembly by
turning it counterclockwise and
pulling it straight out.
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing Headlamps (Sealed Beam)
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position, then open the
hood.
2. Remove the four screws from the
headlamp assembly and carefully
remove the lamp/bezel.
3. Remove the four screws and the
retaining ring.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the lamp and
remove the lamp.
To install the new lamp, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
196 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Replacing Front Parking Lamp and Turn Signal Bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs
in this section.
Aerodynamic
Sealed Beam
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
To complete installation, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing Side Marker Bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly. Refer to Replacing headlamp bulbs
in this section.
Maintenance 197
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Aerodynamic
Sealed Beam
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
To complete installation, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing High-Mount Brake Lamp Bulbs
On vehicles without a rear headliner, the interior cargo lamp (if
equipped) must be removed from under the high-mount brake lamp
assembly located inside the vehicle. Then, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws from the
high-mount brake lamp assembly
and lift the lamp from the vehicle.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket.
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedure in reverse order.
198 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulbs
1. Turn the headlamp switch to the
off position.
2. Remove the two screws and the
license plate lamp assembly from
the rear door.
3. Remove bulb socket from lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out from socket and
push in the new bulb.
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Replacing Stop, Turn, Tail, Side Marker, and Backup Lamp Bulbs
The stop, turn, tail, side marker, and backup lamp bulbs are located in
the tail lamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace any of the
bulbs:
1. Turn the headlamp switch to the
off position, then remove the four
screws and the lamp assembly from
the vehicle.
2. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it
from lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in the
new bulb.
To install the lamp, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Maintenance 199
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function Number of
bulbs
Trade number
Headlamps
(aerodynamic)
2 H13/9008
Headlamps (sealed
beam)
2 H6054
Park lamp with
aerodynamic
2 3157A or 3157AK
Park lamp with sealed
beam
2 3157K
Side marker with
aerodynamic
2 W5W
Side marker with
sealed beam
2 194
Back-up lamps 2 3156K or 3156
License plate lamp 1 168
Stop/tail/turn/side
marker lamp
2 3157K
High-mount brake
lamp
2 912
Cargo lamp 1 578
Dome lamp (standard) 1 912
Map/reading lamp 2 578
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
200 Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent
quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (United States only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
[CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant (United
States only) (ZC-32-B2)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-56)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (United States only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
Vehicle Care 201
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
• Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash it
off as soon as possible.
• Remove any exterior accessories before entering a car wash.
Stripes or Graphics (if equipped)
Do not use a commercial or high-pressure wand on the surface or edge
of stripes and graphics. This can cause damage to the film and cause the
edge of the film to peel away from the vehicle surface.
Exterior Chrome
Note: Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as
they can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Apply the product as
you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the
cleaner to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean,
dry rag.
• Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave
cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding
that which is recommended.
• Note: Using other non-recommended cleaners can result in severe
and permanent cosmetic damage.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
202 Vehicle Care
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect the paint on your car from the
elements. We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface
once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of
direct sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a back-and-forth motion, not in
circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss
black) colored trim. The wax discolors or stains the parts over time,
such as:
• Bumpers
• Grained door handles
• Side mouldings
• Mirror housings
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car’s paint should feel smooth, and be free of
streaks and smudges.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
an authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color.
• Before repairing minor paint damage, use a cleaner such as Motorcraft
Bug and Tar Remover to remove particles such as bird droppings, tree
sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before
repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
Vehicle Care 203
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that
require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft
Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to
prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers
do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper
blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and
streaking and smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow
these tips:
• The windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.) or Motorcraft
Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada).
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrates in the U.S., or
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada.
Replace your wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function
properly.
• Do not use abrasive materials, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
204 Vehicle Care
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Note: Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause damage
to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the
side airbag in a collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Apply a layer of high quality foam cleaner designed for automotive
interiors, such as Motorcraft Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner, to the
dry stained area(s) of the item you are cleaning and let it soak in for
one minute.
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring can set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Vehicle Care 205
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning
leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. See
Cleaning Leather Seats in this chapter.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp, white,
cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry, white, cotton cloth to dry these
areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products, such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion, in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. Test any
cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white, cotton cloth
and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area.
Allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
206 Vehicle Care
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning
leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild
soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing spots and stains such as dye transfer, use
Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.Motorcraft
Note: Do not use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC-56
on Lincoln Black Label, Presidential or Reserve Leathers because it can
damage these and other semi-aniline leather seating fabrics. It can also
damage surrounding microfiber accent surfaces. To clean Lincoln Black
Label, Presidential or Reserve Leather, first vacuum the seats to remove
loose dirt. Then wipe the leather with a clean soft cloth dampened with
lukewarm water and a mild soap. Wipe the leather again with a slightly
damp cloth to remove soap residue, and dry with a soft cloth. To
maintain the leather’s resiliency, it should be cleaned whenever soiled.
Vehicle Care 207
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
A clearcoat paint finish coats aluminum wheels and wheel covers. In
order to maintain their condition:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Use a sponge to
remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water when you have completed
the cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers.
• Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in
combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could
wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after
cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few
minutes before doing so. This reduces the risk of increased corrosion
of the brake discs.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), read the following maintenance recommendations to
make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long-term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
208 Vehicle Care
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Body
• Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
• Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax
to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is
washed.
• Lubricate hood latch, all door latches and trunk lid hinges with a light
grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Engine
• The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contains contaminates that may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
Vehicle Care 209
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Brakes
• Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 meters) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle from Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
• Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters)
back and forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.
210 Vehicle Care
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to Utility Vehicle, Van and Truck Owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers.
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle.
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts. Children and infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Utility vehicles, vans and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles, vans and
trucks are not designed for cornering
at speeds as high as passenger cars
any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions.
Wheels and Tires 211
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
How Your Vehicle Differs from Other Vehicles
Sport-utility vehicles, vans and
trucks can differ from some other
vehicles in a few noticeable ways.
Your vehicle may be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody
components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower – to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, sport-utility vehicles,
vans and trucks often will have a
higher center of gravity and a
greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
212 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The Tire
Quality Grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1
1
⁄
2
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Wheels and Tires 213
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
214 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For example: For P-metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) or 36 (2.5 bar) depending on tire size and for Metric tires
36 psi (2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure
will not increase the tire capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load-carrying
capability.
• kPa: KiloPascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been
stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to
the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position) or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Wheels and Tires 215
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Information on P Type Tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that
may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter, this may mean it is
designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization
or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
216 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
G. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 (130)
N 87 (140)
Q 99 (159)
R 106 (171)
S 112 (180)
T 118 (190)
U 124 (200)
H 130 (210)
V 149 (240)
W 168 (270)
Y 186 (299 )
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
Wheels and Tires 217
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the
vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure, which can
be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings, such
as standard load or radial tubeless.
218 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type
Tires
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires. These differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single,
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
A
B
C
B
D
Wheels and Tires 219
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Information on T Type Tires
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires. These differences are
described below.
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport-utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio, which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
A
B
C
D
E
220 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. See the payload description and graphic in the Load
Carrying chapter.
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat build-up and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and
not appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
Wheels and Tires 221
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s maximum
permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be
carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure, which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot (for
example, driven more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at
or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
222 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type mini-spare tires, see the Dissimilar Spare Tire
and Wheel Assembly Information section. Store and maintain at 60 psi
(4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see Dissimilar Spare
Tire and Wheel Assembly Information under Changing a Road Wheel
in this chapter. Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Tire Inflation Information
WARNING: An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or maintained. To reduce the risk of
serious injury, never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat
or seriously under-inflated without first removing the tire from the
wheel assembly for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or
replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect
persons and property.
Wheels and Tires 223
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Administration regulations. For example, during any procedure
involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must utilize a remote
inflation device, and make sure that all persons are clear of the
trajectory area.
224 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Stay out of the trajectory (1) as indicated in the
illustration.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Wheels and Tires 225
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 millimeters),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread is
worn down to 1/16th of an inch (2
millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars,
the tire is worn out and must be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected,
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (such as load, speed,
inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
226 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels, then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Wheels and Tires 227
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the
tire wheel assembly.
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a
pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, the system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your
tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may
be damaged.
228 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Replacing a Tire That is Greenhouse Gas Certified
The tires installed on this vehicle at the factory as original equipment are
certified for Greenhouse Gas and Fuel Efficiency regulations.
Replacement tires must be of equal or lower rolling resistance level
(TRRL or Crr). Consult with your tire supplier(s) for appropriate
replacement tires.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, do
not rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits.
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road.
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking.
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Wheels and Tires 229
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving, the wheels may
be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
WARNING: If the tire label shows different tire pressures for the
front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system, then the settings for the system sensors
need to be updated. Always perform the system reset procedure after
tire rotation. If the system is not reset, it may not provide a low tire
pressure warning when necessary. See the TPMS reset procedure in
this chapter.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and
wheel assembly. A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as
a spare tire or wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from
the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel
assembly, it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used
in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
230 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
scheduled maintenance information) will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
• Rear-wheel drive
vehicles/Four-wheel drive vehicles
(front tires at top of diagram)
• Dual rear wheel vehicles – six
tire rotation
If your vehicle is equipped with dual
rear wheels, it is recommended that
the front and rear tires (in pairs) be
rotated only side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a pair. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be adjusted
for the tires new positions in
accordance with vehicle
requirements.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Wheels and Tires 231
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge.
See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
232 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Wheels and Tires 233
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Note: Each road tire is equipped
with a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire and wheel assembly
cavity. The pressure sensor is
attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the
tire and is not visible unless the tire
is removed. Take care when
changing the tire to avoid damaging
the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate
tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the tire pressure monitoring system will continue to identify an
issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel or tire needs to be
repaired and put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have
the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on
your vehicle. For additional information, see Changing Tires with a
Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this section.
234 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for
information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible
cause
Customer action required
Solid warning light Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Make sure tires are at the
proper pressure. See Inflating
your tires in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
pressure as shown on the Tire
Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light turns
off.
Spare tire in
use
Repair the damaged road wheel
and tire asssembly and reinstall it
on the vehicle to restore system
function. For a description on how
the system functions, see When
your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated
and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Tire rotation
without sensor
training
On vehicles with different front
and rear tire pressures, the tire
pressure monitoring system must
be retrained following every tire
rotation. See Tire rotation in this
chapter.
Wheels and Tires 235
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible
cause
Customer action required
Flashing warning
light
Spare tire in
use
Repair the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly and reinstall it
on the vehicle to restore system
function. For a description on how
the system functions, see When
your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated
and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each
pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger
tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi (14 to
28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight
with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime
temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system
warning light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light
is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
236 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Procedure
WARNING: To determine the required pressure(s) for your
vehicle, see the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See the
Load Carrying chapter for more information.
Note: The system reset procedure needs to be performed after each tire
rotation on vehicles that require different recommended tire pressures in
the front tires as compared to the rear tires.
Overview
To provide the vehicle’s load carrying capability, some vehicles require
different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to
the rear tires. The tire pressure monitoring system equipped on these
vehicles is designed to illuminate the low tire pressure warning light at
two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the tire pressure monitoring system needs to know
when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this information, the system can
detect and properly warn of low tire pressures.
System reset tips:
• To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, the
system reset procedure should be performed at least three feet (one
meter) away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing
the system reset procedure at the same time.
• Do not wait more than two minutes between resetting each tire sensor
or the system will time-out and the entire procedure will have to be
repeated on all four wheels.
• A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the System Reset Procedure
It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least two minutes
and then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires
and have access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition.
Wheels and Tires 237
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off three times. This must be
accomplished within 10 seconds.
If the reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound
once, the system indicator will flash and the message center (if
equipped) will display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE. If this does not
occur, please try again starting at Step 2.
If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the system indicator does not flash and the message center (if
equipped) does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE, seek service
from your authorized dealer.
5. Train the tire pressure monitoring system sensors in the tires using
the following system reset sequence starting with the left front tire in
the following clockwise order:
• Left front (Driver’s side front tire)
• Right front (Passenger’s side front tire)
• Right rear (Passenger’s side rear tire)
• Left rear (Driver’s side rear tire)
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code
has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is
heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and must be repeated.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained
(driver’s side rear tire), the system indicator stops flashing, and the
message center (if equipped) displays:
TRAINING COMPLETE.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated.
238 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the
ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
Full-size matching spare tire and wheel information
This spare tire and wheel will match the road tire and wheel. When
driving with the full size matching spare tire and wheel, do not exceed
70 mph (113 km/h). It is intended for temporary use only. This means if
you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: The use of tire sealant may damage your tire
pressure monitoring system and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the Ford Tire Mobility Kit
sealant should be used. The tire pressure monitoring system sensor and
valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.
WARNING: See Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this
chapter for important information. If the tire pressure monitoring
sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate
when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the
monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System earlier in
this chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible.
During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage.
Wheels and Tires 239
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, then it is intended
for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel assembly that is
the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally
provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it
should be replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or
wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires
and wheels and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire
size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label.
• tow a trailer.
• use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire.
• use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time.
• use commercial car washing equipment.
• try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
240 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
do not:
• exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• use more than one dissimilar spare tire and wheel at a time.
• use commercial car washing equipment.
• use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire and wheel.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead
to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
additional caution should be given to:
• towing a trailer.
• driving vehicles equipped with a camper body.
• driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel,
and seek service as soon as possible.
Wheels and Tires 241
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in park (P) or neutral
(N).
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure to place the transmission in park (P), set
the parking brake and block (in both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being
changed.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported
only by a jack. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone
else could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment
with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided as
original equipment with your vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or
modifications.
WARNING: Never use wheels or lug nuts different than the
original equipment as this could damage the wheel or mounting
system. This damage could allow the wheels to come off while the
vehicle is being driven.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the warning
flashers.
242 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and turn the engine off.
3. To remove the spare tire, open
the rear doors and remove the
thumb screw and anti-theft bracket.
If finger pressure will not remove
the thumb screw, use the lug
wrench to loosen the screw.
4. Remove the access plug under
the left door.
5. Remove the jack handle from the
right side compartment and insert the
tip of the jack handle through the
access hole and into the tube.
6. Turn the jack handle
counterclockwise until the cable is
slack and the tire can be slid from
under the vehicle.
7. Remove the retainer from the spare tire.
To stow the cable retainer with the spare removed, turn the jack handle
clockwise until all slack is removed.
8. Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite the tire you are changing.
On E-450 vehicles, the parking brake is on the transmission. Therefore,
the vehicle will not be prevented from moving when a rear wheel is
lifted, even if the parking brake is applied. Be sure to block both
directions of the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that is
being lifted.
9. Remove the spare tire and jack from the storage location.
10. Remove any wheel trim. Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrench
behind the wheel covers or hubcaps and twist off.
11. Loosen the wheel nut by pulling up on the handle of the lug nut
wrench about one-half turn (counterclockwise). Do not remove the
wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the ground.
Wheels and Tires 243
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Replacing the Tire
1. Assemble the jack handle sections together and lock into the jack. Use
the jack handle to slide the jack under the vehicle.
2. Position the jack to raise the front or rear wheel.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle.
Rear axle jacking points - All
models except E-350 dual rear
wheel and E-450
Rear axle jacking points - E-350
dual rear wheel and E-450
Front axle jacking points:
Note: Do not place the jack under
or on the steering linkage.
Place the jack under the pin on the
front surface of the front axle.
3. Raise the jack until the wheel is
completely off the ground. Turn the
jack handle clockwise if your vehicle
is equipped with a screw-type jack
or pump the jack if equipped with a
hydraulic jack.
4. Remove the lug nuts with the lug nut wrench.
5. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
If your vehicle has single rear wheels, thread the lug nuts on the studs
with the beveled face toward the wheel.
244 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, thread the two element swiveling
lug nuts on the studs with the flange facing toward the wheel.
6. Use the lug nut wrench to screw the lug nut snugly against the wheel.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
8. Remove the jack and fully tighten
the lug nuts in the following
pattern. See Wheel Lug Nut Torque
Specifications.
9. Install any wheel covers, ornaments or hub caps. Make sure they are
snapped in place.
10. Stow the jack, handle and lug wrench.
11. Unblock the wheels.
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack
hardware.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
1
7
3
5
6
4
8
2
Wheels and Tires 245
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, as per your scheduled maintenance
information), or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through
service of other components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock into the bumper drive tube with
the spare tire lock key and jack handle.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to
the specified torque at 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel
disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts
to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 kilometers), and again at
500 miles (800 kilometers) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel
disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
246 Wheels and Tires
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Bolt size and wheel
lug nut type
Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb N•m
9/16 x 18 conical lug
nut
150 200
9/16 x 18 two-piece
lug nut
140 190
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts, apply one drop of motor oil between the
flat washer and the nut. Do not apply motor oil to the wheel nut threads
or the wheel stud threads.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
and mounting surface prior to
installation. Remove any visible
corrosion or loose particles.
Wheels and Tires 247
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine
Cubic inches 330 415
Required fuel
Minimum 87 octane or
E85
Minimum 87
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9
Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug
Spark plug gap
0.051–0.057 inch
(1.29–1.45 mm)
0.052–0.056 inch
(1.32–1.42 mm)
0.051–0.057 inch
(1.29–1.45 mm)
(With CNG Prep
Package)
Compression ratio 9.0:1 9.0:1
248 Capacities and Specifications
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Engine Drivebelt Routing
• 5.4L V8 and 6.8L V10 engines without A/C
• 5.4L V8 and 6.8L V10 engines with A/C
Capacities and Specifications 249
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Brake fluid
1
Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 4 LV
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-20 / WSS-M6C65-A2
Door weatherstrips — Silicone Spray Lubricant
XL-6 /
ESR-M13P4-A
Hinges, latches,
striker plates and
rotors, seat tracks,
fuel filler door hinge
and spring
—
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Grease Spray
XL-5 or equivalent /
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders —
Motorcraft Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 /
None
Engine coolant
2
5.4L engine
28.8 qt (27.2L)
Motorcraft Gold
Antifreeze/Coolant
Prediluted.
VC-7DIL-B (U.S.);
CVC-7DIL-B2 (Canada) /
WSS-M97B51-A1
5.4L engine with
auxiliary rear heat
30.8 qt (29.1L)
6.8L engine
30.4 qt (28.8L)
6.8L engine with
auxiliary rear heat
32.6 qt (30.8L)
250 Capacities and Specifications
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Item Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Engine oil
3,4,5
6.0 qt (5.7L)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic
Blend or Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Full Synthetic
Motor Oil (U.S.)
XO-5W20–QSP or
XO-5W20–QFS (U.S.) /
WSS-M2C945-A
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Super Premium or
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)
CXO-5W20–LSP12 or
CXO-5W20–LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C945-A
Power steering fluid
Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
MERCON LV
XT-10-QLV (U.S.) /
WSS-M2C928–A
CXT-10-LV12 (Canada)
WSS-M2C928–A
Automatic
transmission fluid
6,7
TorqShift
(5–speed)
18.8 qt (17.7L)
MERCON LV
XT-10-QLV (U.S.) /
WSS-M2C928–A
CXT-10-LV12 (Canada)
WSS-M2C928–A
Dana Limited Slip
Axle fluid
M70FF (M267FF)
E-350
8
6.6 pt (3.1L)
Motorcraft SAE 90
Hypoid Gear Lubricant
ESW-M2C105–A
Dana Limited Slip
Axle fluid
M70HD (M273HD)
E-450
8
9.0 pt (4.3L)
Capacities and Specifications 251
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Item Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Dana conventional
axle fluid
M70FF (M267FF)
E-350
8
6.6 pt (3.1L)
SAE 80W-90 Premium
Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Dana conventional
axle fluid
M70HD (M273HD)
E-450
8
9.0 pt (4.3 L)
Windshield washer
fluid
Fill as required
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate With
Bitterant (U.S.)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.) /
WSB-M8B16-A2
Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid
(Canada)
CXC-37-(A, B, D, and F)
(Canada) /
WSB-M8B16-A2
252 Capacities and Specifications
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Item Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number /
Ford specification
Fuel tank
9
138 inch wheelbase
(except E-Super
Duty)
40.0 gal (151.0L)
——
158 inch wheelbase
(except E-Super
Duty)
40.0 gal (151.0L)
176 inch wheelbase
(except E-Super
Duty)
40.0 gal (151.0L)
158 inch and
176 inch wheelbase
(E-Super Duty)
55.0 gal (208.0L)
A/C refrigerant
10
1.87 lb (0.85kg)
Motorcraft R–134a
Refrigerant
YN-19 (U.S.) /
WSH-M17B19–A
CYN-16–R (Canada) /
WSH-M17B19–A
A/C refrigerant
compressor oil
10
8 fl oz (237ml)
Motorcraft PAG
Refrigerant Compressor
Oil
YN-12–D /
WSH-M1C231–B
Capacities and Specifications 253
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Item Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number /
Ford specification
A/C refrigerant
compressor oil (With
prep package)
10
16 fl oz (473ml)
Motorcraft PAG
Refrigerant Compressor
Oil
YN-12–D /
WSH-M1C231–B
1
Ford recommends using Motorcraft (Ford) DOT 4 LV High Performance Brake Fluid or
equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may
cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake
fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may
result in brake system damage and possible failure.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
3
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Your engine has been designed
to use Motorcraft engine oils or equivalent oils that meet Ford specifications. It is also acceptable
to use an engine oil of recommended viscosity grade that meets API SN requirements and
displays the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
4
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives in your engine. They are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that is not covered by your Ford warranty.
5
Do not use API S category oils labeled as SN, SM, SL or lower category unless the label also
display the API certification mark. These oils do not meet the requirements of the engine and
emission systems.
6
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV should only use MERCON LV fluid. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
7
See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling.
8
Fill Dana rear axles to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14 mm) below bottom of fill hole.
9
Optional fuel tank 55.0 gallons (208.0L).
10
See warning below.
254 Capacities and Specifications
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains
refrigerant R–134a under high pressure. Opening the air
conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Only qualified
personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
MOTORCRAFT® PART NUMBERS
Component 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine
Air filter element FA-1632 FA-1632
Battery- standard /
(auxiliary)
BXT-65-650 /
(BXT-65-750)
BXT-65-650 /
(BXT-65-750)
Oil filter FL-820-S FL-820-S
Spark plugs SP-521 SP-521
Torqshift automatic
transmission internal
bottom–pan filter
FT-180 FT-180
Windshield wiper blade WW-2005 WW-2005
Motorcraft replacement parts are recommended for scheduled
maintenance and are available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com.
These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications, and
are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle
performance, emissions, and durability. Your warranty may be void for
any damage related to use of other parts.
Should a Motorcraft oil filter not be available, use an oil filter that meets
industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Replace the
spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. Refer to Scheduled
Maintenance for the replacement intervals.
Capacities and Specifications 255
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver’s side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
A. World manufacturer identifier
B. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
C. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D. Engine type
E. Check digit
F. Model year
G. Assembly plant
H. Production sequence number.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
256 Capacities and Specifications
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, the door latch post, or the
edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver’s seating position.
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
On completed derivations of incomplete vehicles, the certification label is
affixed at a location determined by a subsequent stage manufacturer of
the completed vehicle. In these cases the completed vehicle is
manufactured in two or more stages by two or more separate
manufacturers.
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description Code
Five-speed automatic (5R110W) T
Capacities and Specifications 257
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
ACCESSORIES
For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your
vehicle, please contact an authorized dealer or visit our online store at
www.Accessories.Ford.com (United States only).
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly authorized
dealer-installed Ford Genuine Accessory found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the defective accessories.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your accessory through the warranty
that provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Interior style
•Carpeted floor mats •All-weather floor mats
•Interior mirrors with
electrochromic compass and
temperature
•Seat covers*
Lifestyle
Peace of mind
•Keyless entry keypad •Back up alarm*
•Remote start •Bumper mounted parking
sensors*
•Vehicle security systems
*The accessory manufacturer designs, develops and therefore warrants
Ford Licensed Accessories, and does not design or test these accessories
to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the manufacturer’s limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed Accessories product limited
warranty from the accessory manufacturer.
258 Accessories
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Ask an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that are equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if the manufacturer did not design the mobile
communication system specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non-Ford electrical or
electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may
adversely affect battery performance and durability. In addition, you
may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES (IF EQUIPPED)
The upfitter option package
provides four switches, mounted in
the center of the instrument panel.
These switches will operate only
while the ignition is in the on
position, whether the engine is
running or not. Ford recommends
that the engine remain running in
order to maintain battery charge when using the upfitter switches for
extended duration or higher current draws.
When switched on, the upfitter switches provide 10 amps, 15 amps or
30 amps of electrical battery power for a variety of personal or
commercial uses.
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
Accessories 259
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
This option also includes a fuse and relay kit. This kit contains the
required fuses and relays that need to be installed into the power
distribution box located under the hood. Refer to the instruction sketch
included in the kit. See an authorized dealer for service.
There will also be one power lead for each switch found as a blunt-cut
and sealed wire located in the underhood cowl shield above the engine
block powertrain control module.
They are coded as follows:
Switch
Circuit
Number
Wire Color
Fuse Amp
Rating
AUX 1 CAC05 Yellow 30A
AUX 2 CAC06 Green with
Brown Trace
30A
AUX 3 CAC07 Violet with
Green Trace
10A
AUX 4 CAC08 Brown 15A
Visit www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas for more detailed information about
upfitter switches.
260 Accessories
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Extended Service Plan
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS
WITH A FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
More than 32 million Ford owners have discovered the powerful
protection of Ford Extended Service Plan. It is the only extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides peace of mind
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage.
Ask your authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 1,000
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S. and Canada. It is the only extended service plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or Lincoln dealership
• Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using genuine parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement transportation if your vehicle is at
your authorized dealer for same day covered repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are eligible for
rental car coverage, including bumper to bumper warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.
Extended Service Plan 261
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Extended Service Plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner.
Whenever you sell your vehicle, prospective buyers may have a higher
degree of confidence that vehicle was properly maintained with Ford
ESP, thereby improving resale value.
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan
that covers all scheduled maintenance, and selected wear items. The
coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording your
vehicle’s maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select items that require periodic
attention for normal wear:
• Windshield wiper blades
• Spark plugs (except in California)
• The clutch disc
• Brake pads and linings
• Shock absorbers
• Belts and hoses
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment
Contact your selling authorized Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they
can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving
lifestyle and budget.
262 Extended Service Plan
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Interest Free Finance Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford ESP
has to offer while paying over time. You are pre-approved with no credit
checks, no hassles! To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists at
800-367-3377.
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 8072
Royal Oak, MI 48068-0039
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending
on the plan you purchase, Ford Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
• Rental reimbursement
• Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
• Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
• Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford Extended Service Plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your
own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental. When
you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada and the United States,
provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor Company
dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For more information, visit your
local Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended
Service Plan that is right for you.
Extended Service Plan 263
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors
Distance and
strength
The further you travel from an FM station,
the weaker the signal and the weaker the
reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result in the audio
system muting.
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.75-inch (12 centimeter)
audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into
the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become
jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage
CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved
CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do
not clean in a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods.
264 Audio System
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track
mode (system default) and MP3 folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. Note: The maximum
number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation
through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is important to understand
how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may
be present, (files with extensions other than mp3), only files with the
.mp3 extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This
enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a specific
folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in the
current folder.
Audio System 265
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
AM/FM
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
A. CLK: Press this button to switch the display between the clock and
radio frequency. To set the time:
1. Press and hold CLK until the hours start to flash.
2. Press the arrow buttons to adjust the hours. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to
set the minutes.
3. Press CLK again to exit clock mode.
B. Tune: Press these arrow buttons to manually search through the radio
frequency band. Press and hold for a fast search. In AUDIO mode, press
the buttons to adjust different sound settings.
C. AUDIO: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass,
Fade and Balance.
CLK
AUDIO
C
E
G
F
B
A
D
266 Audio System
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
D. SEEK: Press this button to go to the previous or next strong station
on the frequency band.
E. Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until
sound returns.
F. AM/FM: Press this button to select a frequency band and access
media through the auxiliary input jack.
G. VOL-PUSH:
• Press this button to switch the system off and on.
• Turn the control to adjust the volume.
AM/FM/CD WITH SYNC®
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
A. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
B. CD slot: Insert a CD.
Audio System 267
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
C. Tune: Press this button to manually search through the radio
frequency band. Press and hold for a fast search.
D. Phone: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC®
system. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
E. MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.
• If your vehicle is equipped with satellite radio, you can access
different menus by pressing OK.
• Set the time by pressing MENU until SET HOURS or SET
MINUTES appears and using the arrow buttons to adjust the time.
• Set the strongest stations on the radio frequency by pressing MENU
until AUTOSET appears. AUTOSET does not override your original
presets.
• SPEEDVOL (speed compensated volume) allows you to adjust radio
volume to compensate for noise levels when vehicle speed increases.
• Track/Folder is only available on MP3 files when in CD mode. In
track mode, pressing the SEEK arrows allows you to scroll through
all the tracks on the disc. In folder mode, pressing the SEEK arrows
allows you to scroll through all the tracks within the selected folder.
Press the FOLDER buttons to access other folders.
• COMPRESS (Compression) is only available in CD and MP3 modes.
Switching compression on brings the soft and loud passages together
for a more consistent listening level. Use the SEEK buttons and up
and down arrow buttons to switch it on and off.
F. AUX: Press this button to access the media features of the SYNC®
system. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
G. SEEK:
• In radio mode, press and release these buttons to go to the next (or
previous) preset radio station or disc track.
• In CD and MP3 modes, press these buttons to select the next (or
previous) track, or press and hold to advance (or reverse) within the
same track.
H. Play, Pause and OK:
• Play and Pause allow you to play or pause a track when listening to a
CD.
• OK allows you to confirm commands with phone and media features
of the SYNC system. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
I. SHUFFLE: Play music on the selected CD or MP3 folder in random
order.
J. Folder: Press this button to access the next folder on an MP3 disc.
K. Folder: Press this button to access the previous folder on an MP3
disc.
268 Audio System
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
L. FF: Press this button to manually fast forward in a CD track or MP3
file.
M. REW: Press this button to manually rewind in a CD track or MP3 file.
N. Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until
sound returns.
O. TEXT/SCAN:
• In radio, CD and MP3 modes, press and hold to hear a brief sampling
of radio stations, CD tracks or MP3 files.
• In CD and MP3 modes, press and release to display track title, artist
name and disc title.
Note: In text mode, sometimes the display requires additional text to
show. When the</>indicatorison,pressTEXT and then use the
SEEK buttons to view the additional display text.
P. AM/FM: Press this button to select a frequency band.
Q. VOL-PUSH:
• Press this button to switch the system off and on.
• Turn it to adjust the volume.
R. CD: Press this button to enter CD or MP3 mode.
SATELLITE RADIO INFORMATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Satellite Radio Channels
Sirius broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a
complete list of Sirius satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in
the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call Sirius at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos
is published under the eCos License.
Audio System 269
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna
obstructions
For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based
broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
Your display may show ACQUIRING...to
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
Sirius Satellite Radio Service
Note: Sirius reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or
delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Sirius satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed Sirius satellite
radio system includes hardware and
a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a complete list of Sirius satellite
radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call Sirius at 1–888–539–7474.
270 Audio System
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio
account. When in satellite radio mode, you can view this number by
pressing SIRIUS and memory preset 1 at the same time. To access your
ESN, press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen, then SIRIUS >
Options.
Troubleshooting
Radio display Condition Possible action
Acquiring Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS
system failure
There is an internal
module or system
failure present.
If this message does
not clear shortly, or
with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See
an authorized dealer
for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no
longer available.
Tune to another
channel or choose
another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does
not include this
channel.
Contact Sirius at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal The signal is lost from
the Sirius satellite or
Sirius tower to your
vehicle antenna.
The signal is blocked.
When you move into
an open area, the
signal should return.
Updating Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required.
The process may take
up to three minutes.
Audio System 271
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Radio display Condition Possible action
Call SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Your satellite service is
no longer available.
Call Sirius at
1–888–539–7474 to
resolve subscription
issues.
None Found. Check
Channel Guide.
All the channels in the
selected category are
either skipped or
locked.
Use the channel guide
to turn off the Lock or
Skip function on that
station.
Subscription Updated Sirius has updated the
channels available for
your vehicle.
No action required.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the
settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is
moving.
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location,
such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is
moving. Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop,
which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension cable
must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely
stored while your vehicle is moving.
272 Audio System
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
The auxiliary input jack allows you
to connect and play music from
your portable music player through
your vehicle speakers. You can use
any portable music player designed
for use with headphones. Your audio
extension cable must have male
1
⁄
8
-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors
at each end.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and portable music player. Set the
parking brake and put the transmission in position P.
2. Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the
auxiliary input jack.
3. Switch the radio on. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Switch your portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its
maximum level.
6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display. You
should hear music from your device even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the
volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and
forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.
USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Audio System 273
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
The USB port allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory
sticks and charge devices (if
supported). See the SYNC chapter
for more information.
274 Audio System
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows
you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic,
Directions & Information) (if equipped).
• Use applications, such as Pandora and Stitcher, via SYNC AppLink™
(if applicable).
• Access phonebook contacts and music via voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition system.
• USB device charging (if your device supports this).
SYNC® 275
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Make sure you review your device’s manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
cannot answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call: 1–800–392–3673.
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports
online.
• Required to activate the subscription-based SYNC Services and to
personalize your Saved Points and Favorites.
• Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available
for SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted
when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
276 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are
broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so
they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions
as it could cause them damage. See your device’s manual for further
information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See your authorized
dealer.
For your safety, some SYNC functions are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device’s manual before using it with
SYNC.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a
profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This
profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread),
and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The
system also records a short development log of approximately
10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system
data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log remain in
the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in
the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you
no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you
perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to
the vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access the system data for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
SYNC® 277
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further
privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist, Vehicle Health
Report, and Traffic, Directions and Information.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in
front of you.
Initiating a Voice Session
Push the voice icon; a tone sounds and Listening appears in the
display. Say any of the following:
Say: If you want to:
“Phone” Make calls.
“USB” Access the device connected to your USB
port.
“Bluetooth Audio” Stream audio from your phone.
“Line in” Access the device connected to the auxiliary
input jack.
“Cancel” Cancel the requested action.
“SYNC” Return to the main menu.
“Voice settings” Adjust the level of voice interaction and
feedback.
“Vehicle Health Report” Run a vehicle health report.
*
“Services” Access the SYNC Services portal.
*
“Mobile apps” Access mobile applications.
*
“Help” Hear a list of voice commands available in the
current mode.
*
If equipped, U.S. only.
278 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions
and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings). You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you
learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
Push the voice icon; when prompted, say “Voice settings”, then
any of the following:
When you say: The system:
“Interaction mode standard” Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance.
“Interaction mode advanced” Provides less audible interaction and
more tone prompts.
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not
sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to
your request. (For example, the system may ask “Phone, is that
correct?”) If turned off, the system simply makes a best guess as to what
you requested and you may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
“Confirmation prompts on”
“Confirmation prompts off”
The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level
of several options based on your voice command. When turned on, you
may be prompted with as many as four possibilities for clarification.
For example, “Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home. Say 2 after
the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after the tone to call Jane
Doe at home.” Or, “Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe, Say 2 after the
tone to play Johnny Doe.”
“Phone candidate lists on”
“Phone candidate lists off”
“Media candidate lists on”
“Media candidate lists off”
SYNC® 279
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular
phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth
wireless technology support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call
• Ending a call
• Using privacy mode
• Dialing a number
• Redialing
• Call waiting notification
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your
phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 1000 entries
per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the
transmission is in position P.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
280 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
1. Press the phone button; when the display indicates no phone is
paired, press OK.
2. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
3. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
4. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
Depending on your phone’s capability and your market, the system may
prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as the
primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first
upon vehicle start-up), downloading your phone book, etc.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and that
the transmission is in position P.
1. Press the phone button and scroll until System Settings is selected.
2. Press OK and scroll until Bluetooth Devices is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll until Add Bluetooth Device is selected and press OK.
4. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
5. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
6. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when
the pairing is successful.
7. The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to
set the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC
automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up),
download your phone book, etc.
SYNC® 281
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and say “Phone”. Say any of the following:
“PHONE”
“Call <name>”
1,2
“Call <name> on mobile OR cell”
1,2
“Call <name> on other”
1,2
“Phone book <name> at home”
2
“Phone book <name> on mobile OR cell”
2
“Call history outgoing”
2
“Phone book <name> on Other”
2
“Call history missed”
2
“Menu”
2,3
“Join”
“Call <name> at home”
1,2
“Call <name> at work” OR “Call <name> in office”
1,2
“Dial”
1,4
“Phone book <name>”
2
“Phone book <name> at work” OR “Phone book <name> at office”
2
“Call history incoming”
2
“Connections”
2
“Go to privacy”
“Hold”
1
These commands do not require you to say “Phone” first.
2
These commands are not available until phone information is completely
downloaded using Bluetooth.
3
See “MENU” table below.
4
See “DIAL” table below.
“MENU”
“(Phone) connections”
*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification off”
*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification on”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer”
*
282 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
“MENU”
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer off”
*
“Battery”
“Phone name”
“Signal”
“Text message inbox”
*
Words in ( ) are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system
to understand the command.
Phone book commands: When you ask SYNC® to access a phone book
name, number, etc., the requested information appears in the display to
view. Press the phone button and say “Call” to call the contact.
“DIAL”
“411” (four-one-one), “911” (nine-one-one)
“700 (seven hundred)” (seven hundred)
“800 (eight hundred)” (eight hundred)
“900 (nine hundred)” (nine hundred)
“#” (pound)
“<number> 0–9”
“Asterisk” (*)
“Clear” (deletes all entered digits)
“Delete” (deletes one digit)
“Plus”
“Star”
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press
MENU to go to the PHONE menu.
SYNC® 283
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Making Calls
Press the voice icon and when prompted say:
1. Say “Call <name>” or “Dial”, then the desired number.
2. When the system confirms the number, say “Dial” again to initiate the
call.
To erase the last spoken digit, say “Delete” or press the left arrow
button. To erase all spoken digits, say “Clear” or press and hold the left
arrow button.
To end the call, press and hold the phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the phone button.
• Reject the call by pressing and holding the phone button.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active Call
During an active call, you have additional menu features which become
available such as putting a call on hold, joining calls, etc. Use the arrow
buttons to scroll through the menu options.
To access:
1. Press MENU during an active call.
2. When Active Call Menu is selected, press OK.
3. Scroll to cycle through the following options:
When you select: You can:
Mute Call?
Mute the call.
Privacy
Switch a call from an active hands-free
environment to your cellular phone for a more
private conversation.
Press OK when Privacy on/off appears. (The
display indicates In Privacy and the system
transfers your call.)
Call Hold
Put an active call on hold.
Press OK when Place Call on Hold? appears.
To answer another call at this time, press the
phone button.
284 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Join Calls
Join two separate calls.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC
or use voice commands to place the second
call. Once actively in the second call, press
MENU.
3. Scroll until Join Calls appears and press
OK. Press OK again when Join Calls? appears.
Note: SYNC supports a maximum of three
callers on a multiparty/conference call.
Enter Tones
Enter “tones” such as numbers for passwords.
Scroll until the desired number appears in the
display, then press OK; a tone sounds as
confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
Phonebook
Access your phonebook contacts.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through
your phonebook contacts.
2. Press OK again when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button.
Call History
Access your call history log.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through
your call history options (incoming, outgoing
or missed).
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the
selection.
Return
Exit the current menu.
SYNC® 285
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Accessing Features through the Phone Menu
The SYNC phone menu allows you to redial a number, access your call
history and phone book and send text messages as well as access phone
and system settings. You can also access advanced features, such as 911
Assist, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select: You can:
Phone Redial
Redial the last number called (if available).
Press OK to select, then press OK again to
confirm.
Call History
1
Allows you to access any previously dialed,
received or missed calls while your phone has
been connected to the system.
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming,
Call History Outgoing or Call History Missed.
Press OK make your selection.
3. Press OK or the phone button to call the
desired selection.
Note: The system attempts to automatically
re-download your phone book and call history
each time your phone connects to SYNC (if
the auto download feature is on and your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone supports
this feature).
Phonebook
1,2
Allows you to access your downloaded
phonebook.
1. Press OK to confirm and enter. If your
phonebook has fewer than 255 listings, they
appear alphabetically in flat file mode. If there
are more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
2. Scroll until the desired contact appears,
then press OK.
3. Press OK or the phone button.
286 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Text Message
1
Enables you to send, download and delete
text messages.
Phone Settings
1
Allows you to view your phone’s status, set
ring tones, select your message notification,
change phone book entries and automatically
download your cellular phone among other
features.
SYNC Services
3
Access the SYNC services portal where you
can request various types of information,
traffic reports and directions.
911 Assist
4
Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for
you after an accident (if the feature is used
properly).
Vehicle Health
Report
3
Create and receive a diagnostic report card on
your vehicle.
Mobile Apps
3
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile
applications on your smartphone.
System Settings
Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (prompts,
languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
Exit Phone Menu
Exit the phone menu by pressing OK.
1
This is a phone-dependent feature.
2
This is a phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.
3
If equipped, United States only.
4
If equipped, United States and Canada only.
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages.
The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do
not have to take your eyes off the road.
SYNC® 287
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text
messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature and can
only be done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the display
indicates you have a new message. You have these options:
1. Press the voice button, wait for the prompt and say “Read Message”
to have SYNC read the message to you.
2. Press OK to receive and open the text message or do nothing and
the message goes into your text message inbox. Press OK again and
SYNC reads your message aloud as you are not able to view the
message. You can then also choose whether you’d like to reply or
forward the message.
3. Press OK and scroll to choose between:
• Reply to Text Message: Press OK to access and then scroll
through the list of pre-defined messages to send.
• Forward Text Message: Press OK to forward the message to
anyone in your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose
Enter Number.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone is
compatible, SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text
messages.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Text Message appears and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Send Text Message? enables you to send a new text message based on
a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
Download Unread Msgs allows you to download your unread messages
(only) to SYNC. To download the messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates your messages are being downloaded. When complete,
SYNC takes you to your inbox.
Delete All Messages? allows you to delete current text messages from
SYNC (not your phone). To delete the messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates when all your text messages have been deleted and
SYNC returns you to the text message menu.
288 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Note: SYNC does not automatically download all of your unread text
messages at every ignition cycle (as it does with call history and
phonebook if automatic download is set to on).
Return exits the current menu when you press OK.
If you select Send Text Message?:
1. Press OK to select. If the system detects your phone does not
support this feature, Unsupported appears in the display and SYNC
returns to the main menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through the message options in the following chart.
3. Press OK when the desired selection is in the display. The system
now needs to know who to send the message to.
4. Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or Call History entries. You can
also select Enter Number to audibly enter a desired number.
5. Press OK to enter the desired menu and scroll to select the specific
contact.
6. Press OK when the contact appears and press OK again to confirm
when the system asks if you would like to send the message. Each
text message is sent with the following signature: “This message was
sent from my <Ford or Lincoln>”.
Pre-defined text message options
Can’t talk right now
Call me
Call you later
Be there in 10 minutes
Be there in 20 minutes
Yes
No
Why?
Thanks
Where R you?
I need more directions
I love you
Too funny
Can’t wait to see you
I’m stuck in traffic
SYNC® 289
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to
access and adjust features such as your ring tone, text message
notification, modify your phone book and also set up automatic
download.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Phone Settings appears, then press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
When you select: You can:
Phone Status
See the provider, name, signal power, battery
power and roaming status of your connected
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to view the
information. When done, press OK again to
return to the phone status menu.
Set Ringer
Select which ring tone sounds during an
incoming call (one of the system’s or your
phone’s).
1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear
Ringer 1, Ringer 2, Ringer 3 and Phone
Ringer.
2. Press OK to select.
Note: If your phone supports in-band ringing,
your phone’s ringer sounds when Phone
Ringer is chosen.
Message Notification
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to
notify you when a text message arrives.
1. Press OK to select and scroll between
Message Notification On or Message
Notification Off.
2. Press OK to select.
290 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Modify Phonebook
Modify the contents of your phone book
(such as add, delete, download). Press OK to
select and scroll between:
Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts
from your phone book. Push the desired
contact(s) on your phone. See your phone’s
user guide on how to push contacts.
Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the
current phone book and call history. When
Delete Phonebook appears, press OK to
confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
Download Phonebook: Press OK to select and
press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
Auto Download
Automatically download your phone book
each time your phone connects to SYNC.
Press OK to select. When Auto Download
On? appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each
time.
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook
every time your phone connects to SYNC.
Your phonebook, call history and text
messages can only be accessed when your
specific phone is connected to SYNC.
Note: Downloading times are phone- and
quantity-dependent.
Note: When auto download is on, any
changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download are deleted.
Return
Exit the current menu.
SYNC® 291
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
System Settings
System Settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the
menu options.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect, delete and set a
phone as primary as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect, delete, set a phone as primary,
and turn Bluetooth on or off.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears and select OK.
292 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: You can:
Add Bluetooth
Device
*
See Using SYNC with your phone earlier in
this chapter for pairing instructions.
Connect Bluetooth
Device
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
previously paired phones.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen,
then press OK to connect the phone.
Note: Only one device can be connected at a
time. When another phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.
Set Primary Phone Set a previously paired phone as your primary
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to select the
desired phone. Press OK to confirm.
Note: SYNC attempts to connect with the
primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a
phone is selected as primary, it appears first
in the list and is marked with an asterisk (*).
Set Bluetooth On/Off
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK.
Note: Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all
Bluetooth devices and deactivates all
Bluetooth features.
Delete Device
Delete a paired phone.
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete All Devices
Delete all previously paired phones (and all
information originally saved with those
phones).
Press OK to select.
Return
Exit the current menu.
*
This is a speed-dependent feature.
SYNC® 293
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: You can:
Prompts
Get help from SYNC by using questions,
helpful hints or asking you for a specific
action. To turn these prompts on or off:
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
Languages
Choose between English, Espanol and
Francais. Once selected, all of SYNC’s radio
displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. If you change the
language setting, the display indicates that
the system is updating. When complete, SYNC
takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Factory Defaults
Return to the factory default settings. This
selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
294 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
Master Reset
Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (phonebook, call history, text messages
and paired devices) and return to the factory
default settings.
Press OK to select. The display indicates
when complete and SYNC takes you back to
the Advanced menu.
Install Application Install applications you have downloaded.
Press OK and scroll to select. Press OK to
confirm.
System Info
Access the Auto Version number as well as
the FPN number.
Press OK to select.
MAP Profile
This is a Bluetooth component which can
further help your phone with the exchange of
text messages.
Return
Exit the current menu.
SYNC APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone
must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone’s compatibility, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
• SYNC Services (if equipped, United States only): Provides access to
traffic, directions and information such as travel, horoscopes, stock
prices and more.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency.
• Vehicle Health Report (if equipped, United States only): Provides a
diagnostic and maintenance report card of your vehicle.
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications
such as Pandora and Stitcher (if your phone is compatible).
SYNC® 295
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
911 Assist®
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on prior to a
crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911
Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in the
vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a
crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure that you read the 911 Assist
privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any user, that setting applies
for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, a voice message plays
and/or a display message/icon comes on when the vehicle is started after
a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable
safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC
equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing
911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more
information about 911 Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
• For information on airbag deployment, see the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
• For information on the fuel pump shut-off, see the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
296 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Setting 911 Assist On
Perform the following:
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until 911 Assist is selected.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.
4. Scroll to select between On and Off selections.
5. Press OK when the desired option appears in the radio display. Set
On or Set Off appears in the display as confirmation.
Off selections include: Off with reminder and Off without reminder. Off
with reminder provides a display and voice reminder at phone
connection at vehicle start. Off without reminder provides a display
reminder only without a voice reminder at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
• SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
• A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and
connected to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
•
The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the United
States, Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off
(which would activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist is triggered,
SYNC tries to contact emergency services. If a connected phone is
damaged or loses connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to
connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to make the
call to 911.
Before making the call:
•
SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the
call. Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC attempting to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel.”
SYNC® 297
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
If the call is not cancelled and a successful call is made, a pre-recorded
message is played for the 911 operator, then the occupant(s) in the
vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your
name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware was damaged in a crash.
• The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
• The phone(s) paired and connected to the system was thrown from
the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators the vehicle location, and/or other details about the vehicle or crash
to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored
by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other
system, (such as brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle
damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to
use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or
subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review the
Vehicle Health Report privacy notice.
298 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of a diagnostic report card. The vehicle health report contains valuable
information such as:
• Vehicle Diagnostic Information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
• Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer.
You can run a report (after the vehicle has been running a minimum of
60 seconds) by pressing the voice button and saying “Vehicle health
report”, or pressing the phone button.
To run a report using the phone button:
1. Press the phone button to enter Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Vehicle Health is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Vehicle Health Report options
User Preferences:
Press OK to select
and enter the menu.
Scroll to select from:
Automatic Reports: Press OK and select on
or off. Select On to have SYNC automatically
prompt you to run a health report at certain
mileage intervals. Note: You must first turn
this feature on before you can select the
mileage intervals at which you would like to
be prompted.
Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select
between 5000, 7500 or 10000 mile intervals
and press OK to make your selection.
Return: Press OK to exit the menu.
SYNC® 299
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report options
Run Report? Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of
your vehicle’s diagnostic systems and send the
results to Ford where it is combined with
scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls and other field service actions and
unserviced vehicle inspection items from your
authorized dealer.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect
your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and
diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to
Vehicle Health Report may also collect additional vehicle information. Ford
may use the vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you do not
want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information, do not
run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See www.SYNCMyRide.com - Vehicle Health Report
Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement - for more information.
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions & Information (TDI)
(If Equipped, United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level and model year and may
require a subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn directions available
in select markets. Message and data rates may apply. Ford Motor
Company reserves the right to change or discontinue this product service
at any time without prior notification or incurring any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See the Using
SYNC with your phone for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note:
The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
300 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing
so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in
an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of
errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction
and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or
business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you
request and for continuous improvement, the service may collect and
record call details and voice communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you
do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel
information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions,
do not activate or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology
and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic
reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports,
weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone.
3. Once you are connected to the service, follow the voice prompts to
request the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can
also say “What are my choices?” to receive a complete list of available
services from which to choose.
4. Say “Services” to return to the services main menu or for help, say
“Help”.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Navigation Screen
1. Select the Phone hard button.
2. Select the SYNC Apps soft button tab.
3. Select the SYNC Services soft button to connect to SYNC Services.
SYNC® 301
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business
search”. To find the closest business or type of business to your
current location, just say “Business search” and then “Search near
me”. If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say
“Operator” at any time within a Directions or Business search to
speak with a live operator. You may also be prompted to speak with
an operator when the automatic system has difficulty matching your
voice request. The live operator can assist you by searching for
businesses by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections. Operator Assist is
a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more information
on Operator Assist visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your destination. Once your
destination is selected, your current vehicle location is uploaded and
a route based on current traffic conditions is calculated and sent
back to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the
phone call is automatically ended. You then receive audible and visual
driving instructions as you travel toward your destination.
3. While on an active route, you can select or say “Route summary” or
“Route status” to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the
route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and a new route will be
delivered to your vehicle.
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Good-bye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
302 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
SYNC Services quick tips
Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points such as work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or
a news category. To learn more, log onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time (while you
are connected to SYNC Services) to interrupt
a voice prompt or an audio clip (such as a
sports report), wait for the listening tone, and
say your voice command.
Portable Your subscription is associated with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not
your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). You
can pair and connect your phone to any
vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and
continue enjoying your personalized services.
You can even access your account outside the
vehicle. Just use the number on your phone’s
call history. Traffic and Directions features do
not function properly but information services
and the 411 connect and text message
features are available.
SYNC AppLink™
Note: This feature is only available in the United States.
Note: Your smartphone must be paired and connected to SYNC to access
AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port in order
to start the application. It is recommended to lock your iPhone after
starting an application.
Note: The AppLink feature is not available if your vehicle is equipped
with the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch system.
Depending on your display type, you can access AppLink from the media
menu, the phone menu, or by using voice commands. Once an app is
running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering wheel controls.
SYNC® 303
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
To Access Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Browse to Mobile Applications and press OK.
3. Browse to your desired app and press OK.
4. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
5. Scroll until “<App name> Menu” is displayed (such as Pandora
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s
features, such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more
information, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using the Media Menu
1. Press the AUX button to access the SYNC menu.
2. Press the Menu button to access the SYNC Media menu.
3. Browse to Mobile Applications and press OK.
4. Browse to your desired app and press OK.
5. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
6. Scroll until “<App name> Menu” is displayed (such as Pandora
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s
features, such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more
information, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using the Navigation Screen (If Equipped)
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the SYNC Apps tab.
3. Press Mobile Apps.
4. Select the app to start it.
To Access Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice icon.
2. When prompted, say “Mobile Apps”.
3. Say the name of the application after the tone.
4. The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can
press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, such
as “Play Station Quickmix”. Say “Help” to discover available voice
commands.
304 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
USING SYNC WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your digital music player over the
vehicle’s speaker system using the system’s media menu or voice
commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories,
such as artists or albums.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up to 6,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including:
iPod, Zune™, Plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also
supports audio formats such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media Player via the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, ensure that the
device is turned on.
To connect using voice commands:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press the voice icon and when prompted, say “USB”.
3. You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice
commands. See the media voice commands.
To connect using the system menu:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll until Select Source appears and press OK.
4. Scroll to select USB and press OK.
5. Depending on how many digital media files are on your connected
device, Indexing may appear in the radio display. When indexing is
complete, the screen returns to the Play Menu.
6. Press OK and scroll through selections of:
• Play All
• Artists
• Albums
• Genres
• Playlists
• Tracks
• Explore USB
• Similar Music
• Return
When the desired selection appears in the display, press OK to build
your desired music selection.
SYNC® 305
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
What’s Playing?
At any time when a track is playing, you can press the voice
icon and ask the system, “What’s playing?”. The system reads
the metadata tags (if populated) of the playing track to you.
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and, when prompted, say “USB” then any
of the following:
“USB”
“Autoplay off”
“Autoplay on”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play album <name>”
1,3
“Play all”
“Play artist <name>”
1,3
“Play genre <name>”
1,3
“Play next folder”
2
“Play next track”
“Play playlist <name>”
1,3
“Play previous folder”
2
“Play previous track”
“Play song <name>”
1,3
“Play track <name>”
1,3
“Refine album <name>”
1,3
“Refine artist <name>”
1,3
“Refine song <name>”
1,3
“Refine track <name>”
1,3
“Repeat off”
“Repeat on”
“Search album <name>”
1,3
“Search artist <name>”
1,3
“Search genre <name>”
1,3
306 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
“USB”
“Search song <name>”
1,3
“Search track <name>”
1,3
“Shuffle off”
“Shuffle on”
“Similar music”
“What’s playing?”
1
“<name>” is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of any
desired group, artist, etc.
2
Voice commands which are only available in folder mode.
3
Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete.
Voice command guide
“Autoplay” Turn on to listen to music which has already
been randomly indexed during the indexing
process.
Turn off and the system does not begin to
play any of your music until all media has all
been indexed. Indexing times can vary from
device to device and also with regard to the
number of songs being indexed.
“Search/Play Genre” The system searches all the data from your
indexed music and, if available, begins to play
the chosen type of music. You can only play
genres of music which are present in the
GENRE metadata tags that you have on your
digital media player.
“Similar Music” The system compiles a playlist and then plays
similar music to what is currently playing
from the USB port using indexed metadata
information.
“Search/Play
Artist/Track/Album”
The system searches for a specific
artist/track/album from the music indexed
through the USB port.
SYNC® 307
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Voice command guide
“Refine” This allows you to make your previous
command more specific. For example, if you
asked to search and play all music by a
certain artist, you could then say “refine
album” and choose a specific album from the
list to view. If you then select Play, the system
only plays music from that specific album.
Press the voice icon and when prompted say “Bluetooth Audio” and then
any of the following:
“BLUETOOTH AUDIO”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play next track ”
“Play previous track ”
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your media source, how to play
your music (by artist, genre, shuffle, repeat, etc.), and also to add,
connect or delete devices.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select: You can:
Play Menu
Play your music by artist, album, genre,
playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply,
play all. You can also choose to Explore USB
to view the supported digital music files on
your playing device.
See Play Menu later in this section for more
information.
308 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Select Source
SYNC USB: Press OK to access music
plugged into your USB port. You can also plug
in devices to charge them (if supported by
your device). Once connected, the system
indexes any readable media files. (The time
required to complete this depends on the size
of the media content being indexed.) If
Autoplay is on, you can access media files
randomly as they are indexed. If turned off,
indexed media is not available until the
indexing process is complete. SYNC is capable
of indexing thousands of average size media
and notifies you if the maximum indexing file
size is reached.
Bluetooth Audio: This is a phone-dependent
feature which allows you to stream music
playing on your Bluetooth-enabled phone. If
supported by your device, you can press
SEEK to play the previous or next track.
SYNC Line In: Press OK to select and play
music from your portable music player over
the vehicle’s speakers.
Note: If you have already connected a device
to the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require
both USB and line in ports to stream data and
music separately.
SYNC® 309
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Media Settings
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and
select your Autoplay settings. Once these
selections are turned on, they remain on until
turned off. Press SEEK to play the previous
or next track.
Note: Some digital media players require
both USB and line in ports to stream data and
music separately. Press OK to select and then
scroll to choose from:
Shuffle: Press OK to shuffle available media
files in the current playlist. Note: To shuffle
all media tracks, you must select Play All in
the Play Menu and then select Shuffle.
Repeat: Press OK to repeat any song.
Autoplay: Press OK to listen to music which
has already been randomly indexed during
the indexing process.
Mobile Apps Interact with SYNC-capable mobile
applications on your smart phone. See SYNC
AppLink earlier in this chapter for more
information.
System Settings
Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (prompts,
languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
Note: See System Settings for more
information.
Exit Media Menu
Press OK to exit the media menu.
310 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist, album,
genre, playlist, track, similar music or even to explore what is on your
USB device.
1. Make sure that your device is plugged into the USB port and is
turned on.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll to select the Play Menu and press OK.
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no
media. If there are media files, you have the following options to scroll
through and select from:
When you select: You can:
Play All Play all indexed media (tracks) from your
playing device in flat file mode, one at a time
in numerical order.
Press OK to select. The first track title
appears in the display.
Artists
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once
selected, the system lists and then play all
artists and tracks alphabetically. If there are
less than 255 indexed artist, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are categorized in alphabetical
categories.
1. Press OK to select. You can select to play
All Artists or any indexed artist.
2. Scroll until the desired artist is chosen and
press OK.
Albums
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are
less than 255 indexed albums, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
1. Press OK to enter the album menu and
select from playing all albums or from any
individual indexed album.
2. Scroll until the desired album is chosen and
press OK.
SYNC® 311
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Genres
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type.
SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file
mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC
automatically organizes them into alphabetical
categories.
Press OK to select and then scroll to select
the desired genre and press OK.
Playlists
Access your playlists (from formats such as
ASX, .M3U, .WPL, .MTP.). The system lists
your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode.
If there are more than 255, they are organized
into alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired playlist and press OK.
Tracks
Search for and play a specific track which has
been indexed. SYNC lists your tracks
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more than 255, SYNC automatically organizes
them into alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired track and press OK.
Explore USB Explore all supported digital media on your
media device connected to the USB port. You
can only view media content which is
compatible with SYNC; other files saved are
not visible.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to explore
indexed media on your flash drive.
312 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Similar Music Play music similar to what is currently playing
from the USB port. The system uses the
metadata information of each song to compile
a playlist for you.
Press OK to select. The system creates a new
list of similar songs and begins playing. The
metadata tags must be populated for this
feature to include each track.
Note: With certain playing devices, if your
metadata tags are not populated, the tracks
won’t be available in voice recognition, play
menu or similar music. However, if you place
these tracks onto your playing device in “Mass
Storage Device Mode”, they are available in
voice recognition, play menu browsing and
similar music. Unknowns are placed into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Return
Exit the current menu.
System Settings
System settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete a
device as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Your Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults and perform a master reset.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as turn
Bluetooth on and off.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears.
SYNC® 313
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from:
When you select: You can:
Add Bluetooth
Device
*
Allows you to pair additional devices to the
system.
1. Press OK to select and press OK again
when Find SYNC appears in the display.
2. Follow the directions in your phone’s user
guide to put your phone into discovery mode.
A six-digit PIN appears in the display.
3. When prompted on your phone’s six-digit
display, enter the PIN.
Connect Bluetooth
Device
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen
and press OK to connect the device.
Set Bluetooth On/Off
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK. Turning Bluetooth off disconnects
all Bluetooth devices and deactivates
Bluetooth features.
Delete Device
Delete a paired media device.
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete All Devices
Delete all previously paired devices.
Press OK to select.
Return
Exit the current menu.
*
This is a speed-dependent feature
314 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, language,
performing a master reset as well as returning to factory defaults.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to access the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from the following:
When you select: You can:
Prompts
Have SYNC guide you via questions, helpful
hints or ask you for a specific action.
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
Languages
Choose from English, Francais and Espanol.
The displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the
display indicates that the system is updating.
When complete, SYNC takes you back to the
Advanced menu.
Factory Defaults
Return to the factory default settings. This
selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
SYNC® 315
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Master Reset
Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (all phonebook, call history, text
messages and all paired devices) and return
to the factory default settings.
Application Download new software applications (if
available) and then load the desired
applications through your USB port. See the
web site for more information.
Return
Exit the current menu.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see
the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your phone’s compatibility, register
your account and set preferences as well as access a customer
representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for
more information.
Phone issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
There is
excessive
background noise
during a phone
call.
The audio control
settings on your
phone may be
affecting SYNC
performance.
Review your phone’s user guide
regarding audio adjustments.
During a call, I
can hear the
other person but
they cannot hear
me.
Possible phone
malfunction.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device, removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
316 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Phone issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC is not able
to download my
phonebook.
• Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
• Possible phone
malfunction.
• Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
• Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
• Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the website.
The system says
Phonebook
Downloaded but
my phonebook in
SYNC is empty or
is missing
contacts.
Limitations on
your phone’s
capability.
• Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
• If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
• Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated
with the missing contact.
SYNC® 317
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Phone issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I am having
trouble
connecting my
phone to SYNC.
• Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
• Possible phone
malfunction.
• Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
• Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Try deleting your device from
SYNC, deleting SYNC from your
device and trying again.
• Check the security and auto
accept/prompt always settings
relative to the SYNC Bluetooth
connection on your phone.
• Update your device’s software
firmware.
• Turn off the Auto phonebook
download setting.
Text messaging is
not working on
SYNC.
• Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
• Possible phone
malfunction.
• Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
• Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
318 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
USB and media issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I am having
trouble
connecting my
device.
Possible device
malfunction.
• Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Make sure you are using the
manufacturer’s cable.
• Make sure the USB cable is
properly inserted into the device
and the vehicle’s USB port.
• Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-install
program or active security
settings.
SYNC does not
recognize my
device when I
turn on the car.
This is a device
limitation.
Make sure you are not leaving
the device in your vehicle
during very hot or cold
temperatures.
Bluetooth audio
does not stream.
• Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
• The device is
not connected.
Make sure the device is
connected to SYNC and that you
have pressed play on your
device.
SYNC does not
recognize music
that is on my
device.
• Your music files
may not contain
the proper artist,
song title, album
or genre
information, OR
• The file may be
corrupted, OR
• The song may
have copyright
protection which
does not allow it
to play.
• Make sure that all song details
are populated.
• Some devices require you to
change the USB settings from
mass storage to MTP class.
SYNC® 319
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions and
Information) issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I received a text
that the Vehicle
Health Report is
not activated.
• Your account
may not be
activated on the
website, OR
• You may have
the wrong VIN
(vehicle
identification
number) listed.
• This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use it.
• Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your account.
I am unable to
retrieve the report
on the website, or
I receive a system
error.
The preferred
dealer information
did not load
correctly.
When you register your account,
you must list a preferred dealer. If
one is already listed, try selecting
another dealer and logging out.
Log back in and change it back to
your preferred dealer and retrieve
the report.
I am unable to
submit a report.
• This could be
due to your
phone’s
compatibility, OR
• Bad signal
strength, OR
• Your phone may
not be activated
on the website.
• Update your mobile number in
your account on the website.
• Make sure you have full signal
strength and that your Bluetooth
volume level has been turned up.
• Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
I heard a
commercial when I
tried to use
Traffic, Directions
and Information.
• The phone in
use is not
activated, OR
• Your phone has
ID blocker active.
• This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use it.
• Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recognizes
you by your phone number.
• Make sure the currently
connected phone is the same one
that is registered on your
SyncMyRide account.
320 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Voice command issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand what
I am saying.
• You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
• You may be
speaking too soon
or at the wrong
time.
• Review the Phone voice
commands and the Media voice
commands at the beginning of
their respective sections.
• Be aware that the microphone
for SYNC is either in your rear
view mirror or in the headliner
just above the windshield.
SYNC does not
understand the
name of a song or
artist.
• You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
• You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
• The system
may not be
reading the name
the same way you
are saying it.
• Review the media voice
commands at the beginning of
the media section.
• Say the song or artist exactly
as listed. If you say, “Play Artist
Prince”, the system does not
play music by Prince and the
Revolution or Prince and the
New Power Generation.
• Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
“California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles”.
• If the songs are saved in all
CAPS, you have to spell them.
LOLA requires you to say, “Play
L-O-L-A”.
• Do not use special characters
in the title as the system does
not recognize them.
SYNC® 321
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Voice command issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand or is
calling the wrong
contact when I
want to make a
call.
• You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
• You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
• Contacts in
your phonebook
may be very short
and similar, or
they may contain
special
characters, OR
• Your
phonebook
contacts may be
saved in CAPS.
• Review the phone voice
commands at the beginning of
the phone section.
• Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as listed. For
example, if a contact is saved as
Joe Wilson, say “Call Joe
Wilson”.
• The system works better if
you list full names, such as “Joe
Wilson” rather than “Joe”.
• Do not use special characters
such as 123 or ICE, as the
system does not recognize them.
• If contacts are saved in CAPS,
you have to spell them. JAKE
requires you to say, “Call
J-A-K-E”.
322 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
AppLink issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
AppLink Mobile
Applications:
When I select
⬙Find New Apps,⬙
SYNC does not
find any
applications.
An AppLink
capable phone is
not connected to
SYNC.
• Ensure you have a compatible
smartphone; an Android with OS
2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS
or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.
• Additionally, ensure your
phone is paired and connected
to SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on your
device. iPhone users must also
connect to SYNC’s USB port
with an Apple USB cable.
My phone is
connected, but I
still cannot find
any apps.
AppLink-enabled
apps are not
installed and
running on your
mobile device.
• Ensure you have downloaded
and installed the latest version
of the app from your phone’s
app store. Ensure the app is
running on your phone.
• Some apps require you to
register or login on the app on
the phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some may
have a ⬙Ford SYNC⬙ setting, so
check the app’s settings menu
on the phone.
SYNC® 323
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
AppLink issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
My phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, but I still
cannot find any
apps.
Sometime apps
do not properly
close and re-open
their connection
to SYNC, over
ignition cycles,
for example.
• Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle. On
an Android device, if apps have
an ⬙Exit’ or ’Quit’ option, select
that then restart the app.
• If the app does not have that
option, you can also manually
⬙Force Close⬙ the app by going
to the phone’s settings menu,
selecting ’Apps.’ then finding the
particular app and choosing
’Force stop.’ Don’t forget to
restart the app afterwards, then
select ⬙Find New Apps⬙ on
SYNC.
• On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double tab
the home button then swipe up
on the app to close it. Tab the
home button again, then select
the app again to restart it. After
a few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC’s Mobile
App’s Menu.
324 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
AppLink issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
My Android
phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, I
restarted them,
but I still cannot
find any apps.
There is a
bluetooth bug on
some order
versions of the
Android OS that
may cause apps
that were found
on your previous
vehicle drive to
not be found
again if you have
not turned off
bluetooth.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and then
turning Bluetooth back on. If
you are in your vehicle, SYNC
should be able to automatically
reconnect to your phone if you
press the ⬙Phone⬙ button.
My iPhone phone
is connected, my
app is running, I
restarted the app
but I still cannot
find it on SYNC.
The USB
connection to
SYNC may need
to be reset.
Unplug the USB cable from the
phone, wait a moment, and plug
the USB cable back in to the
phone. After a few seconds, the
app should appear in SYNC’s
Mobile Apps Menu. If not,
⬙Force Close⬙ the application
and restart it.
I have an Android
phone. I found
and started my
media app on
SYNC, but there
is no sound or
the sound is very
low.
The bluetooth
volume on the
phone may be
low.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by using
the device’s volume control
buttons which are most often
found on the side of the device.
SYNC® 325
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
AppLink issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I can only see
some of the
AppLink apps
running on my
phone listed in
SYNC’s Mobile
Apps Menu.
Some Android
devices have a
limited number of
bluetooth ports
apps can use to
connect. If you
have more
AppLink apps on
your phone than
the number of
available
Bluetooth ports,
you will not see
all of your apps
listed in SYNC’s
mobile apps
menu.
Force close or uninstall the apps
you do not want SYNC to find. If
the app has a ⬙Ford SYNC⬙
setting, disable that setting in
the app’s settings menu on the
phone.
326 SYNC®
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC® End User License Agreement (EULA)
•
You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed
by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates (“FORD MOTOR COMPANY”)
from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation (“MS”). Those installed software
products of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and
“online” or electronic documentation (“MS SOFTWARE”) are protected by
international intellectual property laws and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or
may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with
additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY. The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and
“online” or electronic documentation (“FORD SOFTWARE”) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The
FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
•
The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by third
party software and service suppliers. The additional software and services
of third party origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and
“online” or electronic documentation (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
•
The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as ⬙SOFTWARE.⬙
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the
following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or
through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Appendices 327
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS:
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an
inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent
in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers
shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech
recognition process.
•
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and
Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble
nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and
only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple
EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
•
SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all
component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if
applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees
to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer
must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with
the terms and conditions of this EULA.
• Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect
the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the
SOFTWARE’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected
328 Appendices
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content
owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able
to access content that requires the upgrade.
•
Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use
technical information gathered in any manner as part of product support
services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and services
suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may use this
information solely to improve their products or to provide customized
services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to
others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to
provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements,
add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the
SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”).
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components
and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are
provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS,
Appendices 329
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without
liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to
you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS SOFTWARE may provide you
with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the
SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third
party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE
provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only
as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to
drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and
abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they
pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided
by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such
as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means,
and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only” or ⬙For Recovery Purposes
Only⬙ you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it
in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms
accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and
“applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or
suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the
printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use
330 Appendices
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and
may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content.
All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this
SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic
form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S.
and other governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection
with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their
affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not
provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their
affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the
DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY
LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING
FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE
LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED
FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY
EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
Appendices 331
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or [AIR®] technology by Adobe
Systems Incorporated. This [Licensee Product] contains [Adobe® Flash®
Player] [Adobe® AIR®] software under license from Adobe Systems
Incorporated, Copyright 娀 1995-2009 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC.
All rights reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
End user notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC™ contains software that is licensed to
Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this
system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and
may subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions
Before using your Windows Automotive-based system, read and follow all
instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual
(“User’s Guide”). Not following precautions found in this User’s Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious consequences.
Keep User’s Guide in Vehicle
When kept in the vehicle, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based
system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first
time, all persons have access to the User’s Guide and read its
instructions and safety information carefully.
WARNING: Operating certain parts of this system while driving
can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly
cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while
driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting
these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing
some functions you might be required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from the wheel.
332 Appendices
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
General operation
Voice Command Control
Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be
accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands
from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen
Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen
while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged
attention. Even occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if
your attention has been diverted away from your driving task at a critical
time.
Volume Setting
Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where
you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions
Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is
subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features
Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide
turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make
certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow
instructions and safety information fully.
Distraction Hazard
Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can
seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
Appendices 333
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Let Your Judgment Prevail
Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving
decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never
replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.
Route Safety
Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe
or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if
you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver
is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy
Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in
roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment
and common sense when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services
Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route
you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency
services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as
police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation features.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music — related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 娀
2000–2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 娀 2000–2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued
or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the ⬙Powered by Gracenote™⬙ logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.
334 Appendices
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 (“Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers (“Gracenote Servers”), and to
perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of
the intended End User functions of this device
This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote’s providers. If
so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data
shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote (“Gracenote
Content”), Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music
file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including
all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any information that you
provide, including any copyrighted material or music file information. You
agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or
separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company’s
own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to
allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy
Appendices 335
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA
AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU “AS IS.”
NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY
OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND
SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES’ RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN
THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY
CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT
THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS
NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR
ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS
ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED
BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY
LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
娀 Gracenote 2007
Vehicle with SYNC only
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1 IC: 1422A-SG1G1
Vehicle with SYNC and MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2 IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
336 Appendices
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio
certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Appendices 337
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it.
Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based
upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle serviced
at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is to
maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your
cost of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and
to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter of this owner’s manual.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage
on parts affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification
their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and Ford-authorized branded
re-manufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed our
specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited miles (kilometers) parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our specifications
and depending on the part, it could affect emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping.
They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops. Please contact
your dealer for details.
338 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is
imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for
various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing.
Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most
appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your
vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance
information.
Ford strongly recommends using only genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized remanufactured replacement parts because they are
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed in
this book and in the Workshop Manual. Additional chemicals or
additives not approved by Ford Motor Company are not recommended as
part of normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic
and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid
needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of
overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected
immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory-trained technicians
at your dealership. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the
specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid
that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system, or using
a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Scheduled Maintenance 339
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Owner Checks and Services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
every month or at six month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if
necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as
necessary.
340 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection
Accessory drive belt(s) Horn operation
Battery performance Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Engine air filter Suspension component for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system Steering and linkage
Exterior lamps and hazard
warning system operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and
proper pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
For oil and fluid leaks Washer spray and wiper operation
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission, power
steering and window washer.
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire
sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It is your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You will
know what has been checked, what is okay, as well as those things that
may require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle
inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!
Scheduled Maintenance 341
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
342 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
Normal scheduled maintenance
Every 7500 miles
(12000 km) or six
months (whichever
comes first)
Change engine oil and filter.
Rotate tires
*
, inspect tire wear and measure
tread depth.
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Perform multi-point inspection
(recommended).
Every 15000 miles
(24000 km) or
12 months (whichever
comes first)
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level.
Consult dealer for requirements.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system strength and
hoses.
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints,
suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and
U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings.
*
Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.
Scheduled Maintenance 343
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Other maintenance items
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Replace engine air filter.
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Consult dealer for requirements.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
seal if non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 97500 miles
(156000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 105000 miles
(168000 km)
Change engine coolant.
*
Change rear axle fluid (Dana axles).
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
**
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Change rear axle fluid (non-Dana axles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100000 miles (160000 km).
Replace front wheel bearings and seals if
non-sealed bearings are used.
*
Initial replacement at six years or 105000 miles (168000 kilometers),
then every three years or 45000 miles (72000 kilometers).
**
If not replaced, inspect every 15000 miles (24000 kilometers).
344 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Maintenance Schedule Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 345
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
346 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 347
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
If you operate your vehicle primarily in one of the more demanding
conditions listed below, you need to have some items maintained more
frequently. If you only occasionally operate your vehicle under these
conditions, it is not necessary to perform the additional maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or
technician.
Towing a trailer or car-top carrier
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints, if equipped with
grease fittings.
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires
*
, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or six
months
Change engine oil and filter.
Inspect and lubricate U-joints, if equipped with
grease fittings.
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
seals if non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
*
Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances as in
heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or
livery)
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km)
Inspect brake system.
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if
equipped with grease fittings.
Rotate tires
*
, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
348 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances as in
heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or
livery)
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or six
months
Change engine oil and filter.
Inspect and lubricate U-joints, if equipped with
grease fittings.
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
seals if non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
*
Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or
dusty roads
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace engine air filter.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires
*
, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or six
months
Change engine oil and filter.
Inspect and lubricate U-joints, if equipped with
grease fittings.
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
seals if non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 50000 miles
(80000 km)
Change rear axle fluid.
*
Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels
when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted.
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
Every oil change
interval
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
with regular unleaded fuel.
Scheduled Maintenance 349
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Special Operating Condition Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
350 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 351
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
EXCEPTIONS
Normal Vehicle Axle Maintenance
Rear axles and power take-off units with synthetic fluid and light-duty
trucks equipped with Ford-design axles are lubricated for life; do not
check or change fluid unless a leak is suspected, service is required or
the assembly has been submerged in water. During long periods of trailer
towing with outside temperatures above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open
throttle for long periods above 45 mph (72 km/h), non-synthetic rear
axle fluids should be changed every 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) or
three months, whichever comes first. This interval can be waived if the
axle is filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification
WSL-M2C192-A, part number F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent. Add friction
modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axles (see Technical specifications in the Capacities
and Specifications chapter for details).
Axle Maintenance
Change the axle fluid anytime an axle is submerged in water.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the California Air Resources
Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item
does not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability before the
completion of your vehicle’s useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at
the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa
or locations with similar climates using an American Petroleum Institute
(API) Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN
quality, the normal oil change interval is 3000 miles (5000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change
interval is 1800 miles (3000 kilometers).
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air filter is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air
filter and cabin air filter.
352 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
Initial change Six years or 105000 miles (168000 km)
(whichever comes first)
After initial change Every three years or 45000 miles (72000 km)
Engine Coolant Change Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 353
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
911 Assist™ ..............................296
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................113
Accessing call history/phone
book during active call .............284
Accessing your media menu
features ......................................308
Accessing your phone menu
features ......................................286
Accessory delay ..........................63
Active call menu options .........284
Advanced menu options ...294, 315
Advanced menu options
(prompts, languages, defaults,
master reset, installing
applications) ..............................294
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................40
and child safety seats ..............41
description ................................40
disposal ......................................47
driver airbag ..............................40
passenger airbag .......................40
passenger deactivation
switch ........................................41
side airbag .................................40
Air cleaner filter .......190–191, 255
Air conditioning ....................82–83
manual heating and air
conditioning system ...........82–83
Ambulance packages ..................14
Antifreeze (see Engine
coolant) .....................................172
Anti-lock brake system (see
Brakes) ......................................113
Anti-theft system ........................55
arming the system ....................56
AppLink™ .................................303
Audio system
Single CD ........................266–267
Audio system
(see Radio) ........................266–267
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................108
fluid, adding ............................177
fluid, checking ........................177
fluid, refill capacities ..............250
fluid, specification ..................250
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ..272
Auxiliary powerpoint ..................90
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........250
refill capacities ........................250
traction lok ..............................112
B
Battery .......................................186
acid, treating emergencies .....186
jumping a disabled battery ....148
maintenance-free ....................186
replacement, specifications ...255
servicing ..................................186
Booster seats ...............................21
Brakes ........................................113
anti-lock ...................................113
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................113
brake warning light ................113
fluid, checking and adding ....184
fluid, refill capacities ..............250
fluid, specifications .................250
lubricant specifications ..........250
354 Index
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
parking ....................................114
shift interlock ..........................110
trailer ...............................130–131
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....250
CD ......................................266–267
CD player ..................................264
Cell phone use ............................15
Changing a tire .........................239
Child safety seats
automatic locking mode
(retractor) .................................32
tether anchorage hardware .....29
Child safety seats - booster
seats .............................................21
Cleaning your vehicle ...............201
engine compartment ..............204
instrument panel ....................206
interior .....................................205
plastic parts ............................203
washing ....................................201
waxing .....................................203
wheels ......................................208
wiper blades ............................204
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ......82–83
Clock ..................................266–267
Coolant ......................................172
checking and adding ..............172
refill capacities ........................250
specifications ..........................250
Cruise control ...........................116
Customer Assistance ................145
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................261
Getting roadside assistance ...145
Getting the service you
need .........................................151
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................157
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................155
D
Daytime running lamps (see
Lamps) .........................................61
Defrost ...................................82–83
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................177
engine oil .................................171
Drivebelt ....................................249
Driveline universal joint and
slip yoke ....................................184
Driving under special
conditions ..................................111
through water .........................142
E
Electronic message center .........74
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................148
running out of fuel .................102
Emergency Flashers .................147
Emission control system ..........105
End user license agreement ....327
Engine ................................248–249
cleaning ...................................204
coolant .....................................172
fail-safe cooling .......................175
lubrication specifications .......250
refill capacities ........................250
Index 355
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
service points ..........................171
Engine block heater ...................97
Engine oil
checking and adding ..............171
dipstick ....................................171
filter, specifications ................255
refill capacities ........................250
specifications ..........................250
Event data recording ..................10
Exhaust fumes ............................96
F
Fail safe cooling ........................175
Floor mats .................................143
Fluid capacities .........................250
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................139
Fuel
cap ...........................................103
capacity ...................................250
choosing the right fuel ...100–101
filler funnel .............................102
filling your vehicle with fuel ..103
filter, specifications ................185
fuel pump shut-off ..................147
octane rating ...........101, 248–249
quality ......................................100
running out of fuel .................102
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .......................99
Fuses ..........................159–160, 164
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............103
Gauges .........................................68
H
Hazard flashers .........................147
Headlamps ...................................60
aiming ..............................191–193
bulb specifications ..................200
checking alignment ........192–193
daytime running lights .............61
flash to pass ..............................60
high beam .................................60
replacing bulbs .......................195
turning on and off ....................60
Head restraints ...........................87
Heating ..................................82–83
Hood ..........................................169
I
Ignition .........................94, 248–249
Illuminated visor mirror .............67
Information displays ...................74
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................107
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................206
cluster ........................................70
J
Jack ............................................239
positioning ...............................239
storage .....................................239
Joining two calls
(multiparty/conference call) ....284
Jump-starting your vehicle ......148
356 Index
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
K
Keyless entry system
autolock .....................................52
Keys .............................................56
positions of the ignition ...........94
L
Lamps ..........................................60
bulb replacement
specifications chart ................200
daytime running light ...............61
headlamps .................................60
headlamps, flash to pass ..........60
interior lamps ...........................62
replacing bulbs .......................195
Lights, warning and indicator ....70
Loading instructions .................125
Load limits .................................119
Locks
autolock .....................................52
doors ..........................................51
Lubricant specifications ...........250
Lug nuts ....................................246
M
Media Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................313
Message center ...........................74
system check button ................75
warning messages .....................79
Mirrors ...................................64, 67
fold away ...................................64
side view mirrors (power) .......64
Motorcraft® parts .............201, 255
O
Octane rating ............................101
P
Pairing other phones ................281
Pairing your phone for the first
time ............................................280
Parking brake ............................114
Parts (see Motorcraft®
parts) .........................................255
Phone Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................292
Phone redial ..............................286
Playing music (by artist,
album, genre, playlist, tracks,
similar) ......................................311
Power distribution box (see
Fuses) ........................................160
Power door locks ........................51
Power mirrors .............................64
Powerpoint ..................................90
Power steering ..........................118
fluid, checking and adding ....185
fluid, refill capacity ................250
fluid, specifications .................250
Power Windows ...........................63
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................139
Privacy information ..................277
Putting a call on/off hold .........284
Index 357
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
R
Radio ..................................266–267
Single CD ........................266–267
Radio reception .........................264
Rear window defroster .........82–83
Receiving a text message .........288
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ........................................23
Relays ................................159–160
Remote entry system
illuminated entry ......................53
locking/unlocking doors ...........51
replacing the batteries .............49
Roadside assistance ..................145
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ............37
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ....................................34
Safety defects, reporting ..........158
Safety information ....................276
Safety restraints ..............31–32, 34
Belt-Minder® ............................35
extension assembly ..................34
for adults .............................31–32
for children ...............................23
safety belt maintenance ...........37
seat belt maintenance ..............37
warning light and chime ..........35
Safety seats for children ............23
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................257
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............343
Seats
child safety seats ......................23
front seats ...........................87, 89
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................55
Selecting your media source
(USB, Line in, BT audio) .........308
Setting the clock ...............266–267
SOS Post Crash Alert .................39
Spark plugs,
specifications .............248–249, 255
Special notice
ambulance conversions ............14
utility-type vehicles ..................14
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................250
Starting a flex fuel vehicle .........96
Starting your vehicle ............94, 96
jump starting ..........................148
Steering wheel ............................58
tilting .........................................58
Sun visor ......................................67
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) (see airbags) ....................40
SYNC® AppLink™ ...................303
SYNC® customer support ........276
SYNC® Services ........................300
T
Temperature control (see
Climate control) ....................82–83
Text messaging .........................287
358 Index
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
Text messaging (sending,
downloading, deleting) .....288, 290
Tilt steering wheel ......................58
Tires ...........................213–214, 239
alignment ................................230
care ..........................................213
changing ..........................239, 242
checking the pressure ............223
inflating ...................................221
label .........................................221
replacing ..........................227, 244
rotating ....................................230
safety practices .......................229
sidewall information ...............215
snow tires and chains ............232
spare tire .........................239–240
terminology .............................214
tire grades ...............................214
treadwear ........................213, 226
Towing ...............................126, 137
recreational towing .................138
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ..............131
trailer towing ..........................126
wrecker ....................................137
Traction control ........................115
Traction-lok rear axle ...............112
Traffic, Directions and
Information ................................300
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ................131
Transmission .............................108
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....110
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................177
fluid, refill capacities ..............250
lubricant specifications ..........250
Turn signal ..................................62
U
Upfitter controls .......................259
USB port ....................................273
Using privacy mode ..................284
V
Vehicle health report ................298
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................256
Vehicle loading ..........................119
Ventilating your vehicle .............96
Voice commands in media
mode ..........................................306
Voice commands in phone
mode ..........................................282
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......70
Washer fluid ..............................186
Water, Driving through .............142
Windows
power .........................................63
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................59
checking and adding fluid .....186
replacing wiper blades ...........190
Wrecker towing .........................137
Index 359
2015 Econoline (eco)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, June 2014
USA (fus)
